[go: up one dir, main page]

WO2024140078A1 - Continuous conditional cell access method and apparatus, and storage medium - Google Patents

Continuous conditional cell access method and apparatus, and storage medium Download PDF

Info

Publication number
WO2024140078A1
WO2024140078A1 PCT/CN2023/136726 CN2023136726W WO2024140078A1 WO 2024140078 A1 WO2024140078 A1 WO 2024140078A1 CN 2023136726 W CN2023136726 W CN 2023136726W WO 2024140078 A1 WO2024140078 A1 WO 2024140078A1
Authority
WO
WIPO (PCT)
Prior art keywords
threshold
cell
equal
candidate
candidate cell
Prior art date
Legal status (The legal status is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the status listed.)
Ceased
Application number
PCT/CN2023/136726
Other languages
French (fr)
Chinese (zh)
Inventor
严雪
许萌
Current Assignee (The listed assignees may be inaccurate. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation or warranty as to the accuracy of the list.)
Datang Mobile Communications Equipment Co Ltd
Original Assignee
Datang Mobile Communications Equipment Co Ltd
Priority date (The priority date is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the date listed.)
Filing date
Publication date
Application filed by Datang Mobile Communications Equipment Co Ltd filed Critical Datang Mobile Communications Equipment Co Ltd
Publication of WO2024140078A1 publication Critical patent/WO2024140078A1/en
Anticipated expiration legal-status Critical
Ceased legal-status Critical Current

Links

Classifications

    • H—ELECTRICITY
    • H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04W—WIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORKS
    • H04W36/00—Hand-off or reselection arrangements
    • H04W36/24—Reselection being triggered by specific parameters
    • H04W36/30—Reselection being triggered by specific parameters by measured or perceived connection quality data
    • H—ELECTRICITY
    • H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04W—WIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORKS
    • H04W36/00—Hand-off or reselection arrangements
    • H—ELECTRICITY
    • H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04W—WIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORKS
    • H04W36/00—Hand-off or reselection arrangements
    • H04W36/0005—Control or signalling for completing the hand-off
    • H04W36/0055—Transmission or use of information for re-establishing the radio link
    • H04W36/0066—Transmission or use of information for re-establishing the radio link of control information between different types of networks in order to establish a new radio link in the target network
    • H—ELECTRICITY
    • H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04W—WIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORKS
    • H04W36/00—Hand-off or reselection arrangements
    • H04W36/24—Reselection being triggered by specific parameters

Definitions

  • an embodiment of the present disclosure provides a continuous conditional cell access method, applied to a terminal, including:
  • the execution condition configuration information specifically includes one or more of the following configuration information:
  • a first offset value is used to determine whether the change condition is met.
  • determining a target cell from candidate cells based on the execution condition configuration information includes:
  • judging whether the serving cell satisfies the leaving condition based on the first threshold includes:
  • the signal quality of the serving cell is lower than a first threshold
  • the signal quality of the serving beam of the serving cell is lower than a first threshold
  • the signal qualities of the N beams scanned by the serving cell are respectively lower than the corresponding first thresholds, where N is greater than or equal to 2;
  • judging whether the candidate cell meets the access condition based on the second threshold includes:
  • the signal quality of the beam with the best signal quality measured in the candidate cell is higher than or equal to the second threshold
  • An average of the signal qualities of N beams measured by the candidate cell is greater than or equal to a second threshold, where N is greater than or equal to 2;
  • the method further comprises:
  • the serving beam and/or the beam is identified by one or more of the following information:
  • a common first threshold is configured for each candidate cell or beam of the serving cell
  • an embodiment of the present disclosure provides a terminal, including a memory, a transceiver, and a processor;
  • the measured signal qualities of at least N beams of the candidate cell are all higher than or equal to a second threshold, where N is greater than or equal to 2;
  • the average of the signal qualities of at least N beams with the best signal qualities of the candidate cell is greater than or equal to a second threshold, where N is greater than or equal to 2;
  • the serving beam and/or the beam is identified by one or more of the following information:
  • the difference between the signal quality of the candidate cell and the signal quality of the serving cell exceeds a first offset value.
  • the configuration manner of the first threshold includes one or more of the following manners:
  • a first threshold is configured for each beam of each candidate cell or serving cell respectively
  • a common first threshold is configured for each candidate cell or beam of the serving cell
  • the configuration manner of the second threshold includes one or more of the following manners:
  • the first threshold is configured by one or more of the following methods:
  • a common first threshold is configured for each candidate cell or beam of the serving cell
  • One first threshold is configured for each of the N beam groups of each candidate cell or serving cell, where N is greater than or equal to 2.
  • the processor is further configured to read the computer program in the memory and perform the following operations:
  • the second threshold is configured by one or more of the following methods:
  • One second threshold is configured for each of the N beam groups of each candidate cell, where N is greater than or equal to 2.
  • the processor before sending the execution condition configuration information to the terminal, the processor is further configured to read the computer program in the memory and perform the following operations:
  • the first offset value is determined and/or generated by a network node that triggers continuous conditional cell access; or,
  • An acquisition module is used to obtain execution condition configuration information
  • the access module includes:
  • the determination unit is used to determine a candidate cell that meets the execution condition as a target cell.
  • the determining unit includes:
  • the signal quality of the serving cell is lower than a first threshold
  • the second determining subunit is configured to determine that the candidate cell meets the access condition when one or more of the following conditions are met:
  • the measured beam signal quality of the candidate cell is higher than or equal to a second threshold
  • the measured signal qualities of at least N beams of the candidate cell are all higher than or equal to a second threshold, where N is greater than or equal to 2;
  • the measured signal qualities of at least N beams of the candidate cell are respectively higher than or equal to the corresponding second threshold, where N is greater than or equal to 2;
  • the signal qualities of at least N beams with the best signal qualities of the candidate cells are all higher than or equal to a second threshold, where N is greater than or equal to 2;
  • the signal qualities of at least N beams with the best signal qualities of the candidate cells are respectively higher than or equal to the corresponding second thresholds, where N is greater than or equal to 2;
  • An average of the signal qualities of N beams measured by the candidate cell is greater than or equal to a second threshold, where N is greater than or equal to 2;
  • a first threshold is configured for each of the N beam groups of the candidate cell or the serving cell, where N is greater than or equal to 2.
  • a fourth generating module is configured to determine and/or generate a first offset value by a network node that triggers continuous conditional cell access; or,
  • FIG1 is a flow chart of a method for continuous conditional cell access provided by an embodiment of the present disclosure.
  • an embodiment of the present disclosure provides a method for continuous conditional cell access, and the execution subject may be a terminal, such as a mobile phone.
  • the method includes:
  • a first offset value is used to determine whether the change condition is met.
  • the leaving condition is optional configuration information
  • the UE determines that the current serving cell meets the leaving condition based on the first threshold, and determines that the candidate cell meets the access condition based on the second threshold, then it is determined that the execution condition for accessing a candidate cell is met.
  • the DC scenario when changing the PSCell (changing the SCG).
  • Another judgment method is to determine that the execution condition for accessing a candidate cell is met if the candidate cell meets the access condition.
  • the UE determines whether the candidate cell meets the access condition based on the second threshold, and if so, determines that the execution condition for accessing a candidate cell is met. For example, in a non-DC scenario, when adding an SCG.
  • Another judgment method is to determine that the execution condition for accessing a candidate cell is met if the candidate cell meets the change condition.
  • the UE determines that the candidate cell meets the execution condition configuration information. After the execution conditions are met, the candidate cells that meet the execution conditions are determined as the target cells.
  • the UE determines that cell 1 among the candidate cells meets the execution condition for accessing a candidate cell, and then determines cell 1 as the target cell to access.
  • the continuous conditional cell access method determines whether access to a candidate cell can be performed in a variety of ways based on the leaving condition, access condition and change condition in the execution condition configuration information. It can be flexibly applied to a variety of scenarios, ensuring the stable progress of the continuous conditional cell addition and/or change process.
  • judging whether the serving cell satisfies the leaving condition based on the first threshold includes:
  • the signal quality of the serving cell is lower than a first threshold
  • the signal qualities of N consecutive serving beams of the serving cell are respectively lower than corresponding first thresholds, where N is greater than or equal to 2;
  • the average of the signal qualities of the N beams scanned by the serving cell is lower than the first threshold, Where N is greater than or equal to 2.
  • the corresponding UE determines whether the serving cell meets the leaving condition through different determination modes.
  • the current serving cell is cell 1, and the first threshold configured for it is 70 dBm.
  • the UE measures that the signal quality of the current serving cell is 67 dBm, which is lower than the corresponding first threshold, and determines that the leaving condition for leaving cell 1 is met.
  • the current service cell is cell 1, and a first threshold is configured for each beam of cell 1. If the UE measures that the signal quality of multiple consecutive service beams or multiple scanned beams of the current service cell is lower than their respective corresponding first thresholds, it determines that the conditions for leaving the service cell are met.
  • the signal quality of the candidate cell is higher than or equal to a second threshold
  • the measured beam signal quality of the candidate cell is higher than or equal to a second threshold
  • the signal qualities of at least N beams with the best signal qualities of the candidate cells are respectively higher than or equal to the corresponding second thresholds, where N is greater than or equal to 2;
  • An average of the signal qualities of N beams measured by the candidate cell is greater than or equal to a second threshold, where N is greater than or equal to 2;
  • the corresponding UE determines whether the candidate cell meets the access condition through different determination modes.
  • the UE determines that the access condition for accessing the candidate cell is met by judging that the signal quality of the candidate cell is higher than or equal to the second threshold.
  • the candidate cells include cell 1, cell 2, and cell 3, the second threshold configured for cell 1 is 85 dBm, the second threshold configured for cell 2 is 78 dBm, and the second threshold configured for cell 3 is 80 dBm.
  • the UE measures the signal quality of cell 1 as 86 dBm, which is higher than 85 dBm, and determines that the access condition for accessing cell 1 is met.
  • the UE determines that the access conditions for accessing the candidate cell are met by judging that the signal quality of the beam is higher than or equal to the second threshold.
  • a second threshold is configured for each beam of cell 1 in the candidate cell. If the UE measures that the signal quality of one or more beams of cell 1 is higher than or equal to the corresponding second threshold, or measures that the signal quality of one or more beams with the best signal quality in cell 1 is higher than or equal to the corresponding second threshold, then it is determined that the access conditions for accessing the candidate cell are met.
  • a common second threshold is configured for the beam of cell 1 in the candidate cell. If the signal quality of one or more beams of cell 1 measured by the UE is higher than or equal to the common second threshold, or the average value of the signal quality of one or more beams of cell 1 is calculated and the average value is higher than or equal to the common second threshold, it is determined that the access conditions for accessing the candidate cell are met.
  • the specific number of multiple beams measured by the UE can be set to a minimum value, that is, the signal quality of at least N beams is judged, N is a positive integer greater than or equal to 2, and the value can be taken according to the actual situation to ensure the accuracy of the judgment result.
  • the terminal can identify which beam it is through the synchronization signal block (Synchronization Signal and PBCH Block, SSB) index (SSB index), the transmission configuration indication (Transmission Configuration Indication, TCI) index (TCI index), the channel state information reference signal (Channel State Information Reference Signal, CSI-RS) index (CSI-RS index) and/or the CSI-RS set index (CSI-RS SET index).
  • the identified beams include the service beam of the serving cell, the beam scanned by the serving cell, the measured beam of the candidate cell, etc.
  • judging whether the candidate cell satisfies the change condition based on the first offset value includes:
  • the difference between the signal quality of the candidate cell and the signal quality of the serving cell exceeds a first offset value.
  • the execution condition configuration information obtained by the UE includes a first configuration value, and the UE determines whether the candidate cell meets the change condition based on the first bias value, that is, it is determined that the signal quality of the candidate cell is better than the signal quality of the serving cell, and the difference between the signal quality of the candidate cell and the signal quality of the serving cell exceeds the first bias value.
  • the current serving cell can be changed to this candidate cell.
  • This method uses the same offset1 value for all candidate cells.
  • offset1 when offset1 is configured outside the configuration information of each candidate cell, from the perspective of each candidate cell, as long as the signal quality of a candidate cell is better than that of the current serving cell, the current serving cell can be changed to this candidate cell.
  • different offset1 values can be configured for different candidate cells; different offset1 values can also be configured for each candidate cell for different serving cells, that is, a first offset value list is configured for each candidate cell.
  • Table (offset1list) that is, different serving cells in the first offset value list of each candidate cell correspond to different offset1 values.
  • the configuration manner of the first threshold includes one or more of the following manners:
  • a common first threshold is configured for each candidate cell or beam of the serving cell
  • a first threshold is configured for each of the N beam groups of the candidate cell or the serving cell, where N is greater than or equal to 2.
  • the network device Before the network device sends the execution condition configuration information to the terminal, it needs to configure the corresponding first threshold for the candidate cell or the serving cell, and there are multiple configuration methods.
  • the network device may configure the first threshold in units of cells, that is, configure a first threshold for each candidate cell or service cell.
  • the first threshold in units of cells, that is, configure a first threshold for each candidate cell or service cell.
  • the network device can configure the first threshold in units of beams, such as configuring a first threshold for each beam of each candidate cell or service cell.
  • the first threshold in units of beams, such as configuring a first threshold for each beam of each candidate cell or service cell.
  • the network device can configure the first threshold in units of beams, such as configuring a common first threshold for the beams of each candidate cell or service cell.
  • the first threshold in units of beams, such as configuring a common first threshold for the beams of each candidate cell or service cell.
  • the network device may configure a first threshold for the specified one or more beams. If the service beam is the specified one or more beams, the first threshold is the specified One or more beam configurations, otherwise a common threshold.
  • the network device can configure the first threshold in units of beam groups, that is, multiple beams that are continuously served or multiple beams that can be scanned can be grouped, and a first threshold can be configured for each beam group.
  • the average value of the signal quality of each beam in the beam group can be compared with the first threshold of the beam group, or the signal quality of all beams in the beam group can be compared with the first threshold of the beam group.
  • the first threshold is determined and/or generated by the network node where the candidate cell is located.
  • the network node where the candidate cell is located determines the value of the first threshold, and/or the network node where the candidate cell is located generates the first threshold configuration information.
  • the second threshold is determined and/or generated by a network node that triggers continuous conditional cell access, or is determined and/or generated by a network node where the candidate cell is located.
  • the first offset value is determined and/or generated by a network node that triggers continuous conditional cell access, or is determined and/or generated by a network node where the candidate cell is located.
  • the first threshold, the second threshold and/or the first offset value may also be generated by configuring the network node.
  • the determination and generation of the threshold may be completed by the same node or by different nodes.
  • the threshold is determined by node 1 and sent to node 2, and node 2 generates the configuration information of the threshold.
  • the generating node may be different from the sending node. It may be sent by node 2, or it may be determined and generated by node 1, sent to node 2, and node 2 transparently transmits it to the UE.
  • the first threshold comprises one or more of the following values:
  • Absolute threshold the absolute threshold is directly configurable
  • the relative threshold refers to a threshold indirectly obtained by configuring the second bias value
  • the first threshold may be an absolute (direct) threshold, that is, the first threshold is directly generated and sent by the network device.
  • the first threshold may also be a relative (indirect) threshold.
  • the network device configures the second offset value offset2, then the first threshold is s-MeasureConfig+/-offset2; that is, the first threshold is an indirectly configured value, and the value of the first threshold is equal to the s-MeasureConfig value of the displayed configuration plus or minus the offset2 value of the displayed configuration.
  • the first threshold may also be s-MeasureConfig, that is, an implicit threshold.
  • the s-MeasureConfig in the RRM measurement configuration is originally used to control the start of non-service cell measurement when the signal quality of SpCell is lower than a threshold. In this solution, it can be used as the first threshold to control and determine whether the UE meets the conditions for leaving the current service cell.
  • the configuration manner of the second threshold includes one or more of the following manners:
  • a second threshold is configured for each of the N beam groups of each candidate cell, where N is greater than or equal to 2.
  • the network device Before the network device sends the execution condition configuration information to the terminal, it needs to configure the corresponding second threshold for the candidate cell or the serving cell, and there are multiple configuration methods.
  • the network device may configure the second threshold in units of cells, that is, configure a second threshold for each candidate cell, and when it is determined that the signal quality of the candidate cell is higher than or equal to the corresponding second threshold, the candidate cell is determined to meet the access condition.
  • the network device can configure the second threshold in units of beams, such as configuring a second threshold for each beam of each candidate cell.
  • the second threshold in units of beams, such as configuring a second threshold for each beam of each candidate cell.
  • the network device may configure the second threshold in units of beams, such as configuring a common first threshold for the beams of each candidate cell.
  • the second threshold in units of beams, such as configuring a common first threshold for the beams of each candidate cell.
  • the flexibility of the configuration method application is improved, and the scientific nature of the threshold setting is improved, thereby improving the accuracy of the execution condition judgment.
  • the second threshold is determined and/or generated by a network node that triggers continuous conditional cell access; or,
  • the second threshold is determined and/or generated by the network node where the candidate cell is located; or,
  • the first offset value is determined and/or generated by a network node that triggers continuous conditional cell access; or,
  • the first bias value is determined and/or generated by a network node where the candidate cell is located; or,
  • the first threshold value, the second threshold value and/or the first offset value are generated by configuring the network node.
  • the first threshold is determined by the network node where the candidate cell is located.
  • the network node where the zone is located or the configuration network node generates the first threshold configuration information.
  • the node for determining the threshold value and the node for generating the threshold configuration information may be the same node or different nodes.
  • node 1 determines a threshold and sends it to node 2, and node 2 generates configuration information for this threshold.
  • node 1 may determine a threshold value and generate threshold configuration information, and send the information to node 2, which then transparently transmits the information to the UE.
  • accessing the target cell includes:
  • the UE receives the execution condition configuration information of each candidate cell sent by the network. At this time, the UE only needs to evaluate the access conditions for accessing the candidate cell. When it is determined that the candidate cell meets the access conditions, the candidate cell can be used as the target cell and added as the UE's service cell, that is, the candidate cell is accessed.
  • the UE receives the execution condition configuration information of each candidate cell sent by the network.
  • the UE determines whether the candidate cell meets the execution condition. If so, the UE accesses the candidate cell that meets the execution condition as the target cell, that is, changes the service cell to the candidate cell, and the UE's original service cell becomes a non-service cell after the change.
  • the method further includes:
  • the UE retains the execution condition configuration information of all candidate cells, and continues to evaluate the execution conditions of the candidate cells based on the execution condition configuration information.
  • the cell can continue to be added or changed.
  • the continuous conditional cell access method provided by the embodiment of the present disclosure is based on execution condition configuration information, which includes the conditions for leaving the current serving cell, the access target, The access conditions of the target candidate cells and/or the change conditions of the serving cells are determined, and whether each candidate cell meets the above execution conditions is determined. If the execution conditions are met, the UE executes cell addition or change, accesses the target candidate cell, and continues to evaluate the execution conditions to perform subsequent cell addition and/or change, thereby realizing the addition and/or change of continuous conditional cells, simplifying the execution condition judgment process of adding and/or changing continuous conditional cells, reducing the complexity of the execution condition configuration, and reducing the signaling overhead.
  • Example 1 The execution conditions of network configuration mainly include the following three conditions:
  • the signal quality of a candidate cell is better than the signal quality of the current serving cell (determined by the first offset value offset1).
  • the first threshold may be threshold 1 or threshold 2 (s-MeasureConfig), and the second threshold may be threshold 3.
  • the network may configure it in the RRM measurement configuration in the configuration information of each candidate cell.
  • the network is configured at the outer layer of each candidate cell configuration.
  • the network configuration is located outside the configuration of each candidate cell.
  • the network can configure it in each candidate cell configuration, that is, from the perspective of the serving cell, as long as the signal quality of a candidate cell is higher than the signal quality of the current serving cell by offset1, the current serving cell can be changed to this candidate cell.
  • This method uses the same offset1 value for all candidate cells; offset1 can also be configured outside the configuration of each candidate cell, that is, from the perspective of each candidate cell, as long as the signal quality of a candidate cell is better than that of the current serving cell, the current serving cell can be changed to this candidate cell.
  • offset1 values can be configured for different candidate cells; offset1 can also be configured outside the configuration of each candidate cell, and different offset1 values are configured for each candidate cell for different serving cells, that is, an offset1 list (offset1list) is configured for each candidate cell.
  • threshold 1 can be configured at the following levels:
  • Threshold 1 is a threshold configured for each cell. That is, a threshold 1 is configured for each candidate cell.
  • Threshold 1 is a threshold configured for each beam. That is, a threshold 1 is configured for each service beam in a candidate cell; or a threshold 1 is configured for each of N consecutive service beams in each candidate cell, for a total of N thresholds 1; or a threshold 1 is configured for each of the N beams that can be scanned in each candidate cell, for a total of N thresholds 1. Wherein, N is a natural number greater than or equal to 2.
  • the network configures a common threshold 4 and a separate threshold 5 for the specified one or more beams. If the serving beam is the specified one or more beams, then threshold 1 is the corresponding threshold 5, otherwise it is the common threshold 4.
  • This common threshold 4 is a threshold shared by N consecutive serving beams in each candidate cell, or a threshold shared by N beams that can be scanned.
  • the network can also select one or more beams and configure a separate threshold 5 for them. Only these one or more beams can/need to use threshold 5.
  • Threshold 1 is a threshold configured for each beam group. N beams that are continuously served or N beams that can be scanned may be grouped, and a threshold 1 may be configured for each beam group.
  • Threshold 1 can be an absolute (direct) threshold, that is, threshold 1 is directly generated and sent by the network device. Threshold 1 can also be a relative (indirect) threshold, for example, relative to the measurement configuration s-MeasureConfig, the network device configures the second offset value offset2, then threshold 1 is The value is s-MeasureConfig+/-offset2; that is, threshold 1 is the value of the indirect configuration, and the value of threshold 1 is equal to the s-MeasureConfig value of the display configuration plus or minus the offset2 value of the display configuration.
  • Threshold 3 can be configured at the following levels:
  • the network configures a common threshold 6 and configures a separate threshold 7 for specifying one or more beams. If the measured beam is the specified one or more beams, threshold 3 is the corresponding threshold 7, otherwise it is the common threshold 6.
  • Threshold 3 is a threshold configured for each beam group. N beams that are continuously served or N beams that can be scanned can be grouped, and a threshold 3 is configured for each beam group.
  • the above-mentioned beam identification method can be a synchronization signal block (Synchronization Signal Block, SSB) index (index), a transmission configuration indication (Transmission Configuration Indication, TCI) index, a channel state information reference signal (Channel State Information-Reference Signal, CSI-RS) index, a CSI-RS set (CSI-RS SET) index, etc.
  • SSB Synchronization Signal Block
  • TCI Transmission Configuration Indication
  • CSI-RS Channel State Information-Reference Signal
  • CSI-RS set CSI-RS set index
  • Example 2 When the first threshold is threshold 1 and the second threshold is threshold 3, the current serving cell is judged to meet the leaving condition based on threshold 1, and the candidate cell that meets the access condition is judged based on threshold 3, so that the process of implementing continuous conditional cell change is as follows:
  • Threshold 1 may also be configured in the outer layer of each candidate cell configuration information, and configured in parallel with other configuration information of each candidate cell or threshold 3. Threshold 3 is associated with the candidate cell configuration information and may not be included in the candidate cell configuration information.
  • threshold 1 is configured in the outer layer of each candidate cell configuration information
  • the threshold 1 of the candidate cell PSCell 0 is used to determine whether the leaving condition is met; if the network does not configure PSCell 0 as one of the candidate cells, then the UE can ignore the judgment of threshold 1.
  • PSCell 0 is configured with threshold 1, the UE needs to evaluate threshold 1; otherwise, only threshold 3 is evaluated.
  • Step 6-1 The UE performs the PSCell change process from PSCell 3 to PSCell 5. After the UE successfully accesses PSCell 5, the UE retains the configuration information of PSCell 1 to PSCell 6 and continues to evaluate.
  • Step 2-2 The UE is currently connected to PSCell 0 and performs the corresponding measurement process.
  • PSCell 0 is not configured with threshold 1, and the UE ignores the judgment of threshold 1.
  • Step 6-3 The UE executes the PSCell change process from PSCell 3 to PSCell 5. After the UE successfully accesses PSCell 5, the UE retains the configuration information of PSCell 1 to PSCell 6 and continues the evaluation.
  • Step 1 In the dual connection (DC) scenario, the UE receives the configuration information of each candidate primary secondary cell (PSCell) and its corresponding execution condition information sent by the network device.
  • PSCell candidate primary secondary cell
  • the PSCell to which the UE is currently connected is PSCell 0.
  • the configuration information of each candidate PSCell received by the UE mainly includes configuration information of a total of 6 candidate PSCells, namely, PSCell 1, PSCell 2, PSCell 3, PSCell 4, PSCell 5, and PSCell 6.
  • the configuration information includes threshold 2 and threshold 3, where threshold 2 is the leaving condition configuration information for leaving the current serving cell, and threshold 3 is the access condition configuration information for accessing a candidate cell.
  • Step 5 When the UE detects that the signal quality of the current PSCell 3 is lower than 70dBm, it meets the conditions for leaving PSCell 3, and the signal quality measured by PSCell 5 is 120dBm, it meets the access conditions for accessing PSCell 5. The UE determines that both threshold 2 and threshold 3 are met, and should execute the PSCell change process, changing from PSCell 3 to PSCell 5.
  • the configuration method of offset2 may be the same as the configuration method of threshold 1 in Example 2, except that the configured value is different; and s-MeasureConfig is displayed in the RRM measurement configuration of the candidate cell.
  • Step 4-1 The UE executes the PSCell change process from PSCell 0 to PSCell 2. After the UE successfully accesses PSCell 2, the UE retains the configuration information of PSCell 1 to PSCell 6 and continues the evaluation.
  • Step 4-2 The UE executes the PSCell change process from PSCell 0 to PSCell 2. After the UE successfully accesses PSCell 2, the UE retains the configuration information of PSCell 1 to PSCell 6 and continues the evaluation.
  • Step 6-2 The UE executes the PSCell change process from PSCell 2 to PSCell 4. After the UE successfully accesses PSCell 4, the UE retains the configuration information of PSCell 1 to PSCell 6 and continues the evaluation.
  • offset1 list (offset1list) is configured for each candidate cell, for example, offset10, offset12, offset13, offset14, offset15, offset16 are configured for PSCell 0, PSCell 2, PSCell 3, PSCell 4, PSCell 5, and PSCell 6 for PSCell 1 respectively; offset10, offset11, offset13, offset14, offset15, offset16, etc. are configured for PSCell 0, PSCell 1, PSCell 3, PSCell 4, PSCell 5, and PSCell 6 for PSCell 2 respectively.
  • Step 2-3 The UE is currently connected to PSCell 0 and performs the corresponding measurement process.
  • Step 3-3 If the difference between the signal quality of PSCell 2 measured by the UE and the signal quality of the current serving cell is better than that of the current serving cell, and is greater than offset10 for PSCell 0 in the offset1list configured for PSCell 2, the UE decides to perform the PSCell change process from PSCell 0 to PSCell 2.
  • Step 4-3 The UE executes the PSCell change process from PSCell 0 to PSCell 2. After the UE successfully accesses PSCell 2, the UE retains the configuration information of PSCell 1 to PSCell 6 and continues the evaluation.
  • Step 5-3 If the signal quality of PSCell 4 measured by the UE is better than the signal quality of the current serving cell (PSCell 2), and the difference is greater than offset12 for PSCell 2 in the offset1list configured for PSCell 4, the UE decides to perform the PSCell change process from PSCell 2 to PSCell 4.
  • PSCell 2 the signal quality of the current serving cell
  • Step 6-3 The UE executes the PSCell change process from PSCell 2 to PSCell 4. After the UE successfully accesses PSCell 4, the UE retains the configuration information of PSCell 1 to PSCell 6 and continues the evaluation.
  • Example 6 When the second threshold is threshold 3, the process of determining whether the candidate cell meets the access condition based on threshold 3, thereby implementing conditional cell addition is as follows:
  • Step 1 In a non-DC scenario, that is, the UE currently does not have an accessed secondary cell group (SCG), the UE receives the configuration information of each candidate cell and the execution condition configuration information sent by the network.
  • SCG secondary cell group
  • Step 2 The UE performs execution condition evaluation. At this time, the UE only needs to evaluate the access condition of the candidate cell based on threshold 3.
  • Step 3 If the network has configured a total of 6 candidate PSCell configuration information from PSCell 1 to PSCell 6 for the UE, when the UE evaluates that the access conditions of the candidate cell PSCell 2 are met, the UE determines to execute the PSCell addition process, that is, determines to add the candidate cell PSCell 2 as the current service PSCell.
  • Step 4 The UE accesses the candidate cell PSCell 2. After the UE successfully accesses the candidate cell PSCell 2, the UE saves all the configuration information of the candidate cells PSCell 1 to PSCell 6 and uses it for subsequent PSCell changes or the next PSCell addition.
  • Example 7 The access condition is determined to be satisfied by the execution condition associated with one or two measurement configuration identifiers measID, thereby realizing the addition or change of the conditional cell.
  • the candidate is determined by using threshold 3. Whether the selected cell meets the access condition.
  • the threshold 3 which is a specific threshold of the display configuration, to make a judgment, it can also be judged by the execution conditions associated with one or two measurement configuration identifiers measID, for example, (class) A4 execution condition, (class) A3 execution condition or (class) A5 execution condition.
  • the UE When the UE is in a non-DC scenario, if the (class) A4 execution condition, (class) A3 execution condition or (class) A5 execution condition is met, the UE can perform conditional cell addition.
  • the continuous conditional cell access method provided by the embodiment of the present disclosure is based on execution condition configuration information, which includes conditions for leaving the current service cell, access conditions for accessing the target candidate cell and/or change conditions for changing the service cell. It is judged whether each candidate cell meets the above execution conditions. If the execution conditions are met, the UE executes cell addition or change, accesses the target candidate cell, and continues to evaluate the execution conditions to perform subsequent cell addition and/or change, thereby realizing the addition and/or change of continuous conditional cells, simplifying the execution condition judgment process of adding and/or changing continuous conditional cells, reducing the complexity of the execution condition configuration, and reducing the signaling overhead.
  • FIG2 is a second flow chart of a method for continuous conditional cell access provided by an embodiment of the present disclosure.
  • an embodiment of the present disclosure provides a method for continuous conditional cell access, and the execution subject may be a network device, such as a base station, etc.
  • the method includes:
  • the execution condition configuration information specifically includes one or more of the following configuration information:
  • a first offset value is used to determine whether the change condition is met.
  • the method further comprises:
  • a common first threshold is configured for each candidate cell or beam of the serving cell
  • One first threshold is configured for each of the N beam groups of each candidate cell or serving cell, where N is greater than or equal to 2.
  • the method before sending the execution condition configuration information to the terminal, the method further includes:
  • the second threshold is determined and/or generated by the network node where the candidate cell is located; or,
  • the first bias value is determined and/or generated by a network node where the candidate cell is located; or,
  • the first threshold value, the second threshold value and/or the first offset value are generated by configuring the network node.
  • the continuous conditional cell access method provided in the embodiment of the present disclosure can refer to the above-mentioned embodiment of the continuous conditional cell access method in which the execution subject is a terminal, and can achieve the same technical effect.
  • the parts and beneficial effects of this embodiment that are the same as the above-mentioned corresponding method embodiments will not be described in detail here.
  • a first offset value is used to determine whether the change condition is met.
  • the signal qualities of N beams scanned by the serving cell are all lower than a first threshold, where N is greater than or equal to 2;
  • the signal quality of the candidate cell is higher than or equal to a second threshold
  • the signal qualities of at least N beams with the best signal qualities of the candidate cells are respectively higher than or equal to the corresponding second thresholds, where N is greater than or equal to 2;
  • the difference between the signal quality of the candidate cell and the signal quality of the serving cell exceeds a first offset value.
  • the configuration manner of the first threshold includes one or more of the following manners:
  • a common first threshold is configured for each candidate cell or beam of the serving cell
  • a first threshold is configured for each of the N beam groups of the candidate cell or the serving cell, where N is greater than or equal to 2.
  • the first threshold comprises one or more of the following values:
  • Absolute threshold the absolute threshold is directly configurable
  • the relative threshold refers to a threshold indirectly obtained by configuring the second bias value
  • the configuration manner of the second threshold includes one or more of the following manners:
  • a second threshold is configured for each of the N beam groups of each candidate cell, where N is greater than or equal to 2.
  • accessing the target cell includes:
  • the processor is further configured to read the computer program in the memory and perform the following operations:
  • FIG4 is a schematic diagram of the structure of a network device provided by an embodiment of the present disclosure.
  • the network device includes a memory 420, a transceiver 400, and a processor 410, wherein:
  • the memory 420 is used to store computer programs; the transceiver 400 is used to send and receive data under the control of the processor 410; the processor 410 is used to read the computer program in the memory 420 and perform the following operations:
  • the execution condition configuration information includes one or more of the following conditions:
  • the transceiver 400 is used to receive and send data under the control of the processor 410 .
  • Processor 410 can be a central processing unit (CPU), an application specific integrated circuit (ASIC), a field programmable gate array (FPGA) or a complex programmable logic device (CPLD).
  • CPU central processing unit
  • ASIC application specific integrated circuit
  • FPGA field programmable gate array
  • CPLD complex programmable logic device
  • the processor can also adopt a multi-core architecture.
  • the first threshold is configured by one or more of the following methods:
  • the first offset value is determined and/or generated by a network node that triggers continuous conditional cell access; or,
  • FIG5 is one of the structural schematic diagrams of a continuous conditional cell access device provided by an embodiment of the present disclosure. As shown in FIG5 , an embodiment of the present disclosure provides a continuous conditional cell access device, including an acquisition module 501 and an access module 502, wherein:
  • the signal qualities of N beams scanned by the serving cell are all lower than a first threshold, where N is greater than or equal to 2;
  • the signal qualities of the N beams scanned by the serving cell are respectively lower than the corresponding first thresholds, where N is greater than or equal to 2;
  • the average of the signal qualities of N consecutive beams of the serving cell is lower than a first threshold, where N is greater than or equal to 2;
  • An average of the signal qualities of N beams scanned by the serving cell is lower than a first threshold, where N is greater than or equal to 2.
  • the signal quality of the candidate cell is higher than or equal to a second threshold
  • the measured signal qualities of at least N beams of the candidate cell are respectively higher than or equal to the corresponding second threshold, where N is greater than or equal to 2;
  • the above-mentioned continuous conditional cell access device provided in the embodiment of the present disclosure can implement all the method steps implemented by the method embodiment in which the execution subject is a terminal, and can achieve the same technical effect.
  • the parts and beneficial effects are described in detail.
  • One second threshold is configured for each of the N beam groups of each candidate cell, where N is greater than or equal to 2.
  • it also includes:
  • a first generating module is configured to determine and/or generate a first threshold by a network node where the candidate cell is located; or,
  • a second generating module is configured to determine and/or generate a second threshold by a network node that triggers continuous conditional cell access; or,
  • a third generating module is configured to determine and/or generate a second threshold by the network node where the candidate cell is located; or,
  • a fifth generating module configured to determine and/or generate a first bias value by a network node where the candidate cell is located; or,
  • the above-mentioned continuous conditional cell access device provided by the embodiment of the present disclosure can implement all the method steps implemented by the method embodiment in which the execution subject is a network device, and can achieve the same technical effect.
  • the parts and beneficial effects of this embodiment that are the same as the method embodiment will not be described in detail here.
  • each functional unit in each embodiment of the present disclosure may be integrated into one processing unit, or each unit may exist physically separately, or two or more units may be integrated into one unit.
  • the above-mentioned integrated unit may be implemented in the form of hardware or in the form of software functional unit.
  • the integrated unit is implemented in the form of a software functional unit and sold or used as an independent product, it can be stored in a processor-readable storage medium.
  • the technical solution of the present disclosure is essentially or the part that contributes to the relevant technology or all or part of the technical solution can be embodied in the form of a software product.
  • the computer software product is stored in a storage medium, including several instructions to enable a computer device (which can be a personal computer, server, or network device, etc.) or a processor (processor) to perform all or part of the steps of the method described in each embodiment of the present disclosure.
  • the aforementioned storage medium includes: U disk, mobile hard disk, read-only memory (ROM), random access memory (RAM), disk or optical disk and other media that can store program code.
  • a computer-readable storage medium is further provided, wherein the computer-readable storage medium stores a computer program, and the computer program is used to enable a computer to execute the continuous conditional cell access method provided by the above-mentioned method embodiments.
  • the above-mentioned computer-readable storage medium provided by the embodiment of the present disclosure can implement all the method steps implemented by the above-mentioned method embodiments, and can achieve the same technical effect.
  • the parts and beneficial effects of this embodiment that are the same as the method embodiment will not be described in detail here.
  • the computer-readable storage medium can be any available medium or data storage device that can be accessed by the processor, including but not limited to magnetic storage (such as floppy disks, hard disks, magnetic tapes, magneto-optical disks (MO), etc.), optical storage (such as CD, DVD, BD, HVD, etc.), and semiconductor storage (such as ROM, EPROM, EEPROM, non-volatile memory (NAND FLASH), solid-state drive (SSD)), etc.
  • magnetic storage such as floppy disks, hard disks, magnetic tapes, magneto-optical disks (MO), etc.
  • optical storage such as CD, DVD, BD, HVD, etc.
  • semiconductor storage such as ROM, EPROM, EEPROM, non-volatile memory (NAND FLASH), solid-state drive (SSD)
  • the term "and/or” describes the association relationship of associated objects, indicating that three relationships may exist.
  • a and/or B may represent three situations: A exists alone, A and B exist at the same time, and B exists alone.
  • the character "/" generally indicates that the associated objects before and after are in an "or” relationship.
  • plurality in the embodiments of the present disclosure refers to two or more than two, and other quantifiers are similar thereto.
  • the applicable systems can be global system of mobile communication (GSM) system, code division multiple access (CDMA) system, wideband code division multiple access (WCDMA) general packet radio service (GPRS) system, long term evolution (LTE) system, LTE frequency division duplex (FDD) system, LTE time division duplex (TDD) system, long term evolution advanced (LTE-A) system, universal mobile telecommunication system (UMTS), worldwide interoperability for microwave access (WiMAX) system, 5G new radio (NR) system, etc.
  • GSM global system of mobile communication
  • CDMA code division multiple access
  • WCDMA wideband code division multiple access
  • GPRS general packet radio service
  • LTE long term evolution
  • FDD LTE frequency division duplex
  • TDD LTE time division duplex
  • LTE-A long term evolution advanced
  • UMTS universal mobile telecommunication system
  • WiMAX worldwide interoperability for microwave access
  • NR new radio
  • EPS Evolved Packet System
  • 5GS 5G System
  • the terminal device involved in the embodiments of the present disclosure may be a device that provides voice and/or data connectivity to a user, a handheld device with a wireless connection function, or a device connected to a wireless Other processing devices of the modem, etc.
  • the names of terminal devices may also be different.
  • the terminal device may be called User Equipment (UE).
  • UE User Equipment
  • Wireless terminal devices can communicate with one or more core networks (CN) via a radio access network (RAN).
  • RAN radio access network
  • Wireless terminal devices can be mobile terminal devices, such as mobile phones (or "cellular" phones) and computers with mobile terminal devices. For example, they can be portable, pocket-sized, handheld, computer-built-in or vehicle-mounted mobile devices that exchange language and/or data with the radio access network.
  • the wireless terminal device may also be referred to as a system, a subscriber unit, a subscriber station, a mobile station, a mobile station, a remote station, an access point, a remote terminal device, an access terminal device, a user terminal device, a user agent, and a user device, but is not limited in the embodiments of the present disclosure.
  • the network device involved in the embodiments of the present disclosure may be a base station, which may include multiple cells providing services for the terminal.
  • the base station may also be called an access point, or may be a device in the access network that communicates with the wireless terminal device through one or more sectors on the air interface, or other names.
  • the network device may be used to interchange received air frames with Internet Protocol (IP) packets, and serve as a router between the wireless terminal device and the rest of the access network, wherein the rest of the access network may include an Internet Protocol (IP) communication network.
  • IP Internet Protocol
  • the network device may also coordinate the attribute management of the air interface.
  • the network device involved in the embodiments of the present disclosure may be a network device (Base Transceiver Station, BTS) in the Global System for Mobile communications (GSM) or Code Division Multiple Access (CDMA), or may be a Wide-band Code Division Multiple Access (WCDMA) network.
  • BTS Base Transceiver Station
  • GSM Global System for Mobile communications
  • CDMA Code Division Multiple Access
  • WCDMA Wide-band Code Division Multiple Access
  • the invention relates to a network device (NodeB) in a wireless Code Division Multiple Access (WCDMA) system, an evolutionary network device (evolutional Node B, eNB or e-NodeB) in a long term evolution (LTE) system, a 5G base station (gNB) in a 5G network architecture (next generation system), a home evolved Node B (HeNB), a relay node, a home base station (femto), a pico base station (pico), etc., which are not limited in the embodiments of the present disclosure.
  • the network device may include a centralized unit (CU) node and a distributed unit (DU) node, and the centralized unit and the distributed unit may also be arranged geographically separately.
  • CU centralized unit
  • DU distributed unit
  • Determine B based on A in the present disclosure means that the factor A should be considered when determining B. It is not limited to “B can be determined based on A alone", but should also include: “Determine B based on A and C", “Determine B based on A, C and E", “Determine C based on A, and further determine B based on C", etc. It can also include taking A as a condition for determining B, for example, "When A meets the first condition, use the first method to determine B"; for example, "When A meets the second condition, determine B", etc.; for example, "When A meets the third condition, determine B based on the first parameter", etc. Of course, it can also be a condition that takes A as a factor for determining B, for example, "When A meets the first condition, use the first method to determine C, and further determine B based on C", etc.
  • Network devices and terminal devices can each use one or more antennas for multiple input multiple output (MIMO) transmission.
  • MIMO transmission can be single user MIMO (SU-MIMO) or multi-user MIMO (MU-MIMO).
  • MIMO transmission can be 2D-MIMO, 3D-MIMO, FD-MIMO or massive-MIMO, or it can be diversity transmission, precoding transmission or beamforming transmission, etc.
  • the embodiments of the present disclosure may be provided as methods, systems, or computer program products. Therefore, the present disclosure may take the form of a complete hardware embodiment, a complete software embodiment, or an embodiment combining software and hardware aspects. It can take the form of a computer program product implemented on one or more computer-usable storage media (including but not limited to disk storage and optical storage, etc.) containing computer-usable program codes.
  • each process and/or box in the flowchart and/or block diagram, as well as the combination of the process and/or box in the flowchart and/or block diagram can be implemented by computer executable instructions.
  • These computer executable instructions can be provided to a processor of a general-purpose computer, a special-purpose computer, an embedded processor or other programmable data processing device to produce a machine, so that the instructions executed by the processor of the computer or other programmable data processing device produce a device for implementing the functions specified in one process or multiple processes in the flowchart and/or one box or multiple boxes in the block diagram.
  • processor-executable instructions may also be stored in a processor-readable memory that can direct a computer or other programmable data processing device to operate in a specific manner, so that the instructions stored in the processor-readable memory produce a product including an instruction device that implements the functions specified in one or more processes in the flowchart and/or one or more boxes in the block diagram.
  • processor-executable instructions may also be loaded onto a computer or other programmable data processing device so that a series of operational steps are executed on the computer or other programmable device to produce a computer-implemented process, whereby the instructions executed on the computer or other programmable device provide steps for implementing the functions specified in one or more processes in the flowchart and/or one or more boxes in the block diagram.

Landscapes

  • Engineering & Computer Science (AREA)
  • Computer Networks & Wireless Communication (AREA)
  • Signal Processing (AREA)
  • Signal Processing For Digital Recording And Reproducing (AREA)
  • Mobile Radio Communication Systems (AREA)

Abstract

The embodiments of the present disclosure provide a continuous conditional cell access method and apparatus, and a storage medium. The continuous conditional cell access method comprises: acquiring execution condition configuration information; based on the execution condition configuration information, determining a target cell from candidate cells and accessing the target cell; wherein the execution condition configuration information comprises one or more of the following conditions: a leaving condition involving leaving a serving cell; an access condition involving accessing a candidate cell; and a changing condition involving changing a cell.

Description

连续条件小区接入方法、装置及存储介质Continuous conditional cell access method, device and storage medium

相关申请的交叉引用CROSS-REFERENCE TO RELATED APPLICATIONS

本申请要求于2022年12月30日提交的申请号为202211739953.0，发明名称为“连续条件小区接入方法、装置及存储介质”的中国专利申请的优先权，其通过引用方式全部并入本文。This application claims priority to Chinese patent application No. 202211739953.0, filed on December 30, 2022, and entitled “Continuous Conditional Cell Access Method, Device and Storage Medium”, which is incorporated herein by reference in its entirety.

技术领域Technical Field

本公开涉及通信技术领域，尤其涉及一种连续条件小区接入方法、装置及存储介质。The present disclosure relates to the field of communication technology, and in particular to a method, device and storage medium for continuous conditional cell access.

背景技术Background technique

在新空口(New Radio，NR)项目中，讨论了连续条件小区添加/变更的方法，即网络提前配置多个候选小区及其执行条件给终端/用户设备(User Equipment，UE)，UE进行执行条件的评估，当UE评估某个候选小区执行条件满足，UE将执行小区添加/变更，接入目标候选小区，当UE执行小区添加/变更成功后，UE保留各候选小区配置信息并继续评估，用于后续的条件小区添加/变更。In the New Radio (NR) project, a method for continuous conditional cell addition/change is discussed, that is, the network configures multiple candidate cells and their execution conditions to the terminal/user equipment (UE) in advance, and the UE evaluates the execution conditions. When the UE evaluates that the execution conditions of a candidate cell are met, the UE will execute cell addition/change and access the target candidate cell. When the UE successfully adds/changes the cell, the UE retains the configuration information of each candidate cell and continues to evaluate for subsequent conditional cell addition/change.

相关技术中用于非连续条件小区的添加/变更机制包括条件切换(Conditional Handover，CHO)机制和条件辅小区组主小区PSCell添加/变更(Conditional PSCell Addition/Change，CPAC)机制。但CHO/CPAC机制并不适用于连续条件小区的添加/变更。若基于CHO/CPAC机制配置单一的执行条件，配置门限不会基于服务小区的不同而不同，这种方式可能导致小区添加/变更过早或过晚，甚至可能导致小区添加/ 变更失败。若基于CHO/CPAC机制为不同服务小区分别配置不同的执行条件，会提高接口和空口配置的复杂度，并使信令开销大大增加。In the related art, the adding/changing mechanisms for non-continuous conditional cells include the Conditional Handover (CHO) mechanism and the Conditional PSCell Addition/Change (CPAC) mechanism. However, the CHO/CPAC mechanism is not applicable to the adding/changing of continuous conditional cells. If a single execution condition is configured based on the CHO/CPAC mechanism, the configuration threshold will not be different based on the serving cell. This approach may cause the cell to be added/changed too early or too late, or even cause the cell to be added/changed too late. If different execution conditions are configured for different service cells based on the CHO/CPAC mechanism, the complexity of the interface and air interface configuration will be increased, and the signaling overhead will be greatly increased.

发明内容Summary of the invention

本公开实施例提供一种连续条件小区接入方法、装置及存储介质，用以解决相关技术中连续条件小区的添加/变更困难以及信令开销大的技术问题。The embodiments of the present disclosure provide a method, device and storage medium for accessing a continuous conditional cell, so as to solve the technical problems of difficulty in adding/changing continuous conditional cells and high signaling overhead in the related art.

第一方面，本公开实施例提供一种连续条件小区接入方法，应用于终端，包括：In a first aspect, an embodiment of the present disclosure provides a continuous conditional cell access method, applied to a terminal, including:

获取执行条件配置信息；Get execution condition configuration information;

基于所述执行条件配置信息从候选小区中确定目标小区并接入所述目标小区；所述执行条件配置信息中包含以下条件中的一种或多种：Determine a target cell from candidate cells based on the execution condition configuration information and access the target cell; the execution condition configuration information includes one or more of the following conditions:

离开服务小区的离开条件；The conditions for leaving the service cell;

接入候选小区的接入条件；Access conditions for accessing candidate cells;

变更小区的变更条件。Change conditions for changing a neighborhood.

在一些实施例中，所述执行条件配置信息具体包含以下配置信息中的一种或多种：In some embodiments, the execution condition configuration information specifically includes one or more of the following configuration information:

用于判断是否满足所述离开条件的第一阈值；A first threshold for determining whether the leaving condition is met;

用于判断是否满足所述接入条件的第二阈值；a second threshold for determining whether the access condition is met;

用于判断是否满足所述变更条件的第一偏置值。A first offset value is used to determine whether the change condition is met.

在一些实施例中，基于所述执行条件配置信息从候选小区中确定目标小区，包括：In some embodiments, determining a target cell from candidate cells based on the execution condition configuration information includes:

通过以下方式中的一种或多种判断所述候选小区是否满足所述执行条件配置信息中包含的执行条件：Determining whether the candidate cell satisfies the execution condition included in the execution condition configuration information by one or more of the following methods:

基于第一阈值判断服务小区是否满足所述离开条件；Determining whether the serving cell satisfies the leaving condition based on a first threshold;

在满足所述离开条件的情况下，基于第二阈值判断所述候选小区 是否满足所述接入条件；When the leaving condition is met, the candidate cell is determined based on the second threshold. whether the access condition is met;

或，or,

基于第二阈值判断所述候选小区是否满足所述接入条件；Determining whether the candidate cell meets the access condition based on a second threshold;

或，or,

基于第一偏置值判断所述候选小区是否满足所述变更条件；Determining whether the candidate cell meets the change condition based on the first offset value;

确定满足所述执行条件的候选小区为目标小区。A candidate cell that meets the execution condition is determined as a target cell.

在一些实施例中，基于第一阈值判断服务小区是否满足所述离开条件，包括：In some embodiments, judging whether the serving cell satisfies the leaving condition based on the first threshold includes:

在满足以下条件中的一个或多个的情况下，确定服务小区满足所述离开条件：When one or more of the following conditions are met, it is determined that the serving cell meets the leaving condition:

服务小区的信号质量低于第一阈值；The signal quality of the serving cell is lower than a first threshold;

服务小区的服务波束的信号质量低于第一阈值；The signal quality of the serving beam of the serving cell is lower than a first threshold;

服务小区的连续N个服务波束的信号质量均低于第一阈值，其中N大于等于2；The signal qualities of N consecutive serving beams of the serving cell are all lower than a first threshold, where N is greater than or equal to 2;

服务小区的连续N个服务波束的信号质量分别低于对应的第一阈值，其中N大于等于2；The signal qualities of N consecutive serving beams of the serving cell are respectively lower than corresponding first thresholds, where N is greater than or equal to 2;

服务小区扫描到的N个波束的信号质量均低于第一阈值，其中N大于等于2；The signal qualities of N beams scanned by the serving cell are all lower than a first threshold, where N is greater than or equal to 2;

服务小区扫描到的N个波束的信号质量分别低于对应的第一阈值，其中N大于等于2；The signal qualities of the N beams scanned by the serving cell are respectively lower than the corresponding first thresholds, where N is greater than or equal to 2;

服务小区的连续N个波束信号质量的均值低于第一阈值，其中N大于等于2；The average of the signal qualities of N consecutive beams of the serving cell is lower than a first threshold, where N is greater than or equal to 2;

服务小区扫描到的N个波束的信号质量的均值低于第一阈值，其中N大于等于2。An average of the signal qualities of N beams scanned by the serving cell is lower than a first threshold, where N is greater than or equal to 2.

在一些实施例中，基于第二阈值判断所述候选小区是否满足所述接入条件，包括：In some embodiments, judging whether the candidate cell meets the access condition based on the second threshold includes:

在满足以下条件中的一个或多个的情况下，确定所述候选小区满 足所述接入条件：When one or more of the following conditions are met, it is determined that the candidate cell is full The access conditions are met:

候选小区的信号质量高于或等于第二阈值；The signal quality of the candidate cell is higher than or equal to a second threshold;

侯选小区的测量到的波束信号质量高于或等于第二阈值；The measured beam signal quality of the candidate cell is higher than or equal to a second threshold;

侯选小区的测量到的信号质量最好的波束信号质量高于或等于第二阈值；The signal quality of the beam with the best signal quality measured in the candidate cell is higher than or equal to the second threshold;

侯选小区的测量到的至少N个波束信号质量均高于或等于第二阈值，其中N大于等于2；The measured signal qualities of at least N beams of the candidate cell are all higher than or equal to a second threshold, where N is greater than or equal to 2;

侯选小区的测量到的至少N个波束信号质量分别高于或等于对应的第二阈值，其中N大于等于2；The measured signal qualities of at least N beams of the candidate cell are respectively higher than or equal to the corresponding second threshold, where N is greater than or equal to 2;

侯选小区的至少N个信号质量最好的波束信号质量均高于或等于第二阈值，其中N大于等于2；The signal qualities of at least N beams with the best signal qualities of the candidate cells are all higher than or equal to a second threshold, where N is greater than or equal to 2;

侯选小区的至少N个信号质量最好的波束信号质量分别高于或等于对应的第二阈值，其中N大于等于2；The signal qualities of at least N beams with the best signal qualities of the candidate cells are respectively higher than or equal to the corresponding second thresholds, where N is greater than or equal to 2;

侯选小区的测量到的N个波束的信号质量的均值高于或等于第二阈值，其中N大于等于2；An average of the signal qualities of N beams measured by the candidate cell is greater than or equal to a second threshold, where N is greater than or equal to 2;

候选小区的至少N个信号质量最好的波束信号质量的均值高于或等于第二阈值，其中N大于等于2；The average of the signal qualities of at least N beams with the best signal qualities of the candidate cell is greater than or equal to a second threshold, where N is greater than or equal to 2;

满足与一个或两个测量配置标识measID关联的执行条件。The execution conditions associated with one or both measurement configuration identifiers measID are met.

在一些实施例中，所述方法还包括：In some embodiments, the method further comprises:

通过以下信息中的一种或多种信息识别所述服务波束和/或所述波束：The serving beam and/or the beam is identified by one or more of the following information:

同步信号块SSB索引；Synchronization signal block SSB index;

传输配置指示TCI索引；Transmission Configuration Indicator TCI index;

信道状态信息参考信号CSI-RS索引；Channel state information reference signal CSI-RS index;

CSI-RS集索引。CSI-RS set index.

在一些实施例中，基于第一偏置值判断所述候选小区是否满足所述变更条件，包括： In some embodiments, judging whether the candidate cell satisfies the change condition based on the first offset value includes:

所述候选小区的信号质量与服务小区的信号质量的差值超过第一偏置值。The difference between the signal quality of the candidate cell and the signal quality of the serving cell exceeds a first offset value.

在一些实施例中，所述第一阈值的配置方式包括以下方式中的一种或多种：In some embodiments, the configuration manner of the first threshold includes one or more of the following manners:

为每一候选小区或服务小区配置一个第一阈值；Configuring a first threshold for each candidate cell or serving cell;

为每一候选小区或服务小区的每个波束分别配置一个第一阈值；A first threshold is configured for each beam of each candidate cell or serving cell respectively;

为每一候选小区或服务小区的波束配置一个公共的第一阈值；A common first threshold is configured for each candidate cell or beam of the serving cell;

为指定的一个或N个波束配置一个第一阈值，其中N大于等于2；Configuring a first threshold for a specified one or N beams, where N is greater than or equal to 2;

为每一候选小区或服务小区的N个波束组分别配置一个第一阈值，其中N大于等于2。A first threshold is configured for each of the N beam groups of the candidate cell or the serving cell, where N is greater than or equal to 2.

在一些实施例中，所述第一阈值包括以下值中的一种或多种：In some embodiments, the first threshold comprises one or more of the following values:

绝对阈值；所述绝对阈值是直接配置的；Absolute threshold; the absolute threshold is directly configurable;

相对阈值；所述相对阈值是指通过配置的第二偏置值间接得到的阈值；Relative threshold; the relative threshold refers to a threshold indirectly obtained by configuring the second bias value;

测量配置s-MeasureConfig值。Measurement configuration s-MeasureConfig value.

在一些实施例中，所述第二阈值的配置方式包括以下方式中的一种或多种：In some embodiments, the configuration manner of the second threshold includes one or more of the following manners:

为每一候选小区配置一个第二阈值；configuring a second threshold for each candidate cell;

为每一候选小区的每个波束分别配置一个第二阈值；configuring a second threshold for each beam of each candidate cell;

为每一候选小区的波束配置一个公共的第二阈值；configuring a common second threshold for the beam of each candidate cell;

为指定的一个或N个波束配置一个第二阈值，其中N大于等于2；configuring a second threshold for the specified one or N beams, where N is greater than or equal to 2;

为每一候选小区的N个波束组分别配置一个第二阈值，其中N大于等于2。A second threshold is configured for each of the N beam groups of each candidate cell, where N is greater than or equal to 2.

在一些实施例中，接入所述目标小区，包括：In some embodiments, accessing the target cell includes:

添加所述目标小区为服务小区；或， adding the target cell as a serving cell; or,

将服务小区变更为目标小区。Change the serving cell to the target cell.

在一些实施例中，接入所述目标小区之后，所述方法还包括：In some embodiments, after accessing the target cell, the method further includes:

继续基于所述执行条件配置信息进行候选小区执行条件的评估。Continue to evaluate the execution condition of the candidate cell based on the execution condition configuration information.

第二方面，本公开实施例提供一种连续条件小区接入方法，应用于网络设备，包括：In a second aspect, an embodiment of the present disclosure provides a continuous conditional cell access method, which is applied to a network device, including:

向终端发送执行条件配置信息；所述执行条件配置信息中包含以下条件中的一种或多种：Sending execution condition configuration information to the terminal; the execution condition configuration information includes one or more of the following conditions:

离开服务小区的离开条件；The conditions for leaving the service cell;

接入候选小区的接入条件；Access conditions for accessing candidate cells;

变更小区的变更条件。Change conditions for changing a neighborhood.

在一些实施例中，所述执行条件配置信息具体包含以下配置信息中的一种或多种：In some embodiments, the execution condition configuration information specifically includes one or more of the following configuration information:

用于判断是否满足所述离开条件的第一阈值；A first threshold for determining whether the leaving condition is met;

用于判断是否满足所述接入条件的第二阈值；a second threshold for determining whether the access condition is met;

用于判断是否满足所述变更条件的第一偏置值。A first offset value is used to determine whether the change condition is met.

在一些实施例中，所述方法还包括：In some embodiments, the method further comprises:

通过以下方式中的一种或多种配置所述第一阈值：The first threshold is configured by one or more of the following methods:

为每一候选小区或服务小区配置一个所述第一阈值；configuring a first threshold for each candidate cell or serving cell;

为每一候选小区或服务小区的每个波束分别配置一个所述第一阈值；configuring one first threshold for each beam of each candidate cell or serving cell respectively;

为每一候选小区或服务小区的波束配置一个公共的第一阈值；A common first threshold is configured for each candidate cell or beam of the serving cell;

为指定的一个或N个波束配置一个所述第一阈值，其中N大于等于2；configuring the first threshold for the specified one or N beams, where N is greater than or equal to 2;

为每一候选小区或服务小区的N个波束组分别配置一个所述第一阈值，其中N大于等于2。One first threshold is configured for each of the N beam groups of each candidate cell or serving cell, where N is greater than or equal to 2.

在一些实施例中，所述方法还包括：In some embodiments, the method further comprises:

通过以下方式中的一种或多种配置所述第二阈值： The second threshold is configured by one or more of the following methods:

为每一候选小区配置一个所述第二阈值；configuring one second threshold for each candidate cell;

为每一候选小区的每个波束分别配置一个所述第二阈值；configuring one second threshold for each beam of each candidate cell;

为每一候选小区的波束配置一个公共的第二阈值；configuring a common second threshold for the beam of each candidate cell;

为指定的一个或N个波束配置一个所述第二阈值，其中N大于等于2；configuring the second threshold for the specified one or N beams, where N is greater than or equal to 2;

为每一候选小区的N个波束组分别配置一个所述第二阈值，其中N大于等于2。One second threshold is configured for each of the N beam groups of each candidate cell, where N is greater than or equal to 2.

在一些实施例中，向终端发送执行条件配置信息之前，所述方法还包括：In some embodiments, before sending the execution condition configuration information to the terminal, the method further includes:

由所述候选小区所在的网络节点确定和/或生成第一阈值；或，The first threshold is determined and/or generated by a network node where the candidate cell is located; or,

由触发连续条件小区接入的网络节点确定和/或生成第二阈值；或，The second threshold is determined and/or generated by a network node that triggers continuous conditional cell access; or,

由所述候选小区所在的网络节点确定和/或生成第二阈值；或，The second threshold is determined and/or generated by the network node where the candidate cell is located; or,

由触发连续条件小区接入的网络节点确定和/或生成第一偏置值；或，The first offset value is determined and/or generated by a network node that triggers continuous conditional cell access; or,

由所述候选小区所在的网络节点确定和/或生成第一偏置值；或，The first bias value is determined and/or generated by a network node where the candidate cell is located; or,

由配置网络节点来生成第一阈值、第二阈值和/或第一偏置值。The first threshold value, the second threshold value and/or the first offset value are generated by configuring the network node.

第三方面，本公开实施例提供一种终端，包括存储器，收发机，处理器；In a third aspect, an embodiment of the present disclosure provides a terminal, including a memory, a transceiver, and a processor;

存储器，用于存储计算机程序；收发机，用于在所述处理器的控制下收发数据；处理器，用于读取所述存储器中的计算机程序并执行以下操作：A memory for storing a computer program; a transceiver for transmitting and receiving data under the control of the processor; and a processor for reading the computer program in the memory and performing the following operations:

获取执行条件配置信息；Get execution condition configuration information;

基于所述执行条件配置信息从候选小区中确定目标小区并接入所述目标小区；所述执行条件配置信息中包含以下条件中的一种或多种：Determine a target cell from candidate cells based on the execution condition configuration information and access the target cell; the execution condition configuration information includes one or more of the following conditions:

离开服务小区的离开条件； The conditions for leaving the service cell;

接入候选小区的接入条件；Access conditions for accessing candidate cells;

变更小区的变更条件。Change conditions for changing a neighborhood.

在一些实施例中，所述执行条件配置信息具体包含以下配置信息中的一种或多种：In some embodiments, the execution condition configuration information specifically includes one or more of the following configuration information:

用于判断是否满足所述离开条件的第一阈值；A first threshold for determining whether the leaving condition is met;

用于判断是否满足所述接入条件的第二阈值；a second threshold for determining whether the access condition is met;

用于判断是否满足所述变更条件的第一偏置值。A first offset value is used to determine whether the change condition is met.

在一些实施例中，基于所述执行条件配置信息从候选小区中确定目标小区，包括：In some embodiments, determining a target cell from candidate cells based on the execution condition configuration information includes:

通过以下方式中的一种或多种判断所述候选小区是否满足所述执行条件配置信息中包含的执行条件：Determining whether the candidate cell satisfies the execution condition included in the execution condition configuration information by one or more of the following methods:

基于第一阈值判断服务小区是否满足所述离开条件；Determining whether the serving cell satisfies the leaving condition based on a first threshold;

在满足所述离开条件的情况下，基于第二阈值判断所述候选小区是否满足所述接入条件；When the leaving condition is met, determining whether the candidate cell meets the access condition based on a second threshold;

或，or,

基于第二阈值判断所述候选小区是否满足所述接入条件；Determining whether the candidate cell meets the access condition based on a second threshold;

或，or,

基于第一偏置值判断所述候选小区是否满足所述变更条件；Determining whether the candidate cell meets the change condition based on the first offset value;

确定满足所述执行条件的候选小区为目标小区。A candidate cell that meets the execution condition is determined as a target cell.

在一些实施例中，基于第一阈值判断服务小区是否满足所述离开条件，包括：In some embodiments, judging whether the serving cell satisfies the leaving condition based on the first threshold includes:

在满足以下条件中的一个或多个的情况下，确定服务小区满足所述离开条件：When one or more of the following conditions are met, it is determined that the serving cell meets the leaving condition:

服务小区的信号质量低于第一阈值；The signal quality of the serving cell is lower than a first threshold;

服务小区的服务波束的信号质量低于第一阈值；The signal quality of the serving beam of the serving cell is lower than a first threshold;

服务小区的连续N个服务波束的信号质量均低于第一阈值，其中N大于等于2； The signal qualities of N consecutive serving beams of the serving cell are all lower than a first threshold, where N is greater than or equal to 2;

服务小区的连续N个服务波束的信号质量分别低于对应的第一阈值，其中N大于等于2；The signal qualities of N consecutive serving beams of the serving cell are respectively lower than corresponding first thresholds, where N is greater than or equal to 2;

服务小区扫描到的N个波束的信号质量均低于第一阈值，其中N大于等于2；The signal qualities of N beams scanned by the serving cell are all lower than a first threshold, where N is greater than or equal to 2;

服务小区扫描到的N个波束的信号质量分别低于对应的第一阈值，其中N大于等于2；The signal qualities of the N beams scanned by the serving cell are respectively lower than the corresponding first thresholds, where N is greater than or equal to 2;

服务小区的连续N个波束信号质量的均值低于第一阈值，其中N大于等于2；The average of the signal qualities of N consecutive beams of the serving cell is lower than a first threshold, where N is greater than or equal to 2;

服务小区扫描到的N个波束的信号质量的均值低于第一阈值，其中N大于等于2。An average of the signal qualities of N beams scanned by the serving cell is lower than a first threshold, where N is greater than or equal to 2.

在一些实施例中，基于第二阈值判断所述候选小区是否满足所述接入条件，包括：In some embodiments, judging whether the candidate cell meets the access condition based on the second threshold includes:

在满足以下条件中的一个或多个的情况下，确定所述候选小区满足所述接入条件：When one or more of the following conditions are met, it is determined that the candidate cell meets the access condition:

候选小区的信号质量高于或等于第二阈值；The signal quality of the candidate cell is higher than or equal to a second threshold;

侯选小区的测量到的波束信号质量高于或等于第二阈值；The measured beam signal quality of the candidate cell is higher than or equal to a second threshold;

侯选小区的测量到的信号质量最好的波束信号质量高于或等于第二阈值；The signal quality of the beam with the best signal quality measured in the candidate cell is higher than or equal to the second threshold;

侯选小区的测量到的至少N个波束信号质量均高于或等于第二阈值，其中N大于等于2；The measured signal qualities of at least N beams of the candidate cell are all higher than or equal to a second threshold, where N is greater than or equal to 2;

侯选小区的测量到的至少N个波束信号质量分别高于或等于对应的第二阈值，其中N大于等于2；The measured signal qualities of at least N beams of the candidate cell are respectively higher than or equal to the corresponding second thresholds, where N is greater than or equal to 2;

侯选小区的至少N个信号质量最好的波束信号质量均高于或等于第二阈值，其中N大于等于2；The signal qualities of at least N beams with the best signal qualities of the candidate cells are all higher than or equal to a second threshold, where N is greater than or equal to 2;

侯选小区的至少N个信号质量最好的波束信号质量分别高于或等于对应的第二阈值，其中N大于等于2；The signal qualities of at least N beams with the best signal qualities of the candidate cells are respectively higher than or equal to the corresponding second thresholds, where N is greater than or equal to 2;

侯选小区的测量到的N个波束的信号质量的均值高于或等于第 二阈值，其中N大于等于2；The average of the signal qualities of the N beams measured by the candidate cell is higher than or equal to the Second threshold, where N is greater than or equal to 2;

候选小区的至少N个信号质量最好的波束信号质量的均值高于或等于第二阈值，其中N大于等于2；The average of the signal qualities of at least N beams with the best signal qualities of the candidate cell is greater than or equal to a second threshold, where N is greater than or equal to 2;

满足与一个或两个测量配置标识measID关联的执行条件。The execution conditions associated with one or both measurement configuration identifiers measID are met.

在一些实施例中，所述处理器还用于读取所述存储器中的计算机程序并执行以下操作：In some embodiments, the processor is further configured to read the computer program in the memory and perform the following operations:

通过以下信息中的一种或多种信息识别所述服务波束和/或所述波束：The serving beam and/or the beam is identified by one or more of the following information:

同步信号块SSB索引；Synchronization signal block SSB index;

传输配置指示TCI索引；Transmission Configuration Indicator TCI index;

信道状态信息参考信号CSI-RS索引；Channel state information reference signal CSI-RS index;

CSI-RS集索引。CSI-RS set index.

在一些实施例中，基于第一偏置值判断所述候选小区是否满足所述变更条件，包括：In some embodiments, judging whether the candidate cell satisfies the change condition based on the first offset value includes:

所述候选小区的信号质量与服务小区的信号质量的差值超过第一偏置值。The difference between the signal quality of the candidate cell and the signal quality of the serving cell exceeds a first offset value.

在一些实施例中，所述第一阈值的配置方式包括以下方式中的一种或多种：In some embodiments, the configuration manner of the first threshold includes one or more of the following manners:

为每一候选小区或服务小区配置一个第一阈值；Configuring a first threshold for each candidate cell or serving cell;

为每一候选小区或服务小区的每个波束分别配置一个第一阈值；A first threshold is configured for each beam of each candidate cell or serving cell respectively;

为每一候选小区或服务小区的波束配置一个公共的第一阈值；A common first threshold is configured for each candidate cell or beam of the serving cell;

为指定的一个或N个波束配置一个第一阈值，其中N大于等于2；Configuring a first threshold for a specified one or N beams, where N is greater than or equal to 2;

为每一候选小区或服务小区的N个波束组分别配置一个第一阈值，其中N大于等于2。A first threshold is configured for each of the N beam groups of the candidate cell or the serving cell, where N is greater than or equal to 2.

在一些实施例中，所述第一阈值包括以下值中的一种或多种：In some embodiments, the first threshold comprises one or more of the following values:

绝对阈值；所述绝对阈值是直接配置的； Absolute threshold; the absolute threshold is directly configurable;

相对阈值；所述相对阈值是指通过配置的第二偏置值间接得到的阈值；Relative threshold; the relative threshold refers to a threshold indirectly obtained by configuring the second bias value;

测量配置s-MeasureConfig值。Measurement configuration s-MeasureConfig value.

在一些实施例中，所述第二阈值的配置方式包括以下方式中的一种或多种：In some embodiments, the configuration manner of the second threshold includes one or more of the following manners:

为每一候选小区配置一个第二阈值；configuring a second threshold for each candidate cell;

为每一候选小区的每个波束分别配置一个第二阈值；configuring a second threshold for each beam of each candidate cell;

为每一候选小区的波束配置一个公共的第二阈值；configuring a common second threshold for the beam of each candidate cell;

为指定的一个或N个波束配置一个第二阈值，其中N大于等于2；configuring a second threshold for the specified one or N beams, where N is greater than or equal to 2;

为每一候选小区的N个波束组分别配置一个第二阈值，其中N大于等于2。A second threshold is configured for each of the N beam groups of each candidate cell, where N is greater than or equal to 2.

在一些实施例中，接入所述目标小区，包括：In some embodiments, accessing the target cell includes:

添加所述目标小区为服务小区；或，adding the target cell as a serving cell; or,

将服务小区变更为目标小区。Change the serving cell to the target cell.

在一些实施例中，接入所述目标小区之后，所述处理器还用于读取所述存储器中的计算机程序并执行以下操作：In some embodiments, after accessing the target cell, the processor is further configured to read the computer program in the memory and perform the following operations:

继续基于所述执行条件配置信息进行候选小区执行条件的评估。Continue to evaluate the execution condition of the candidate cell based on the execution condition configuration information.

第四方面，本公开实施例提供一种网络设备，包括存储器，收发机，处理器；In a fourth aspect, an embodiment of the present disclosure provides a network device, including a memory, a transceiver, and a processor;

存储器，用于存储计算机程序；收发机，用于在所述处理器的控制下收发数据；处理器，用于读取所述存储器中的计算机程序并执行以下操作：A memory for storing a computer program; a transceiver for transmitting and receiving data under the control of the processor; and a processor for reading the computer program in the memory and performing the following operations:

向终端发送执行条件配置信息；所述执行条件配置信息中包含以下条件中的一种或多种：Sending execution condition configuration information to the terminal; the execution condition configuration information includes one or more of the following conditions:

离开服务小区的离开条件；The conditions for leaving the service cell;

接入候选小区的接入条件； Access conditions for accessing candidate cells;

变更小区的变更条件。Change conditions for changing a neighborhood.

在一些实施例中，所述执行条件配置信息具体包含以下配置信息中的一种或多种：In some embodiments, the execution condition configuration information specifically includes one or more of the following configuration information:

用于判断是否满足所述离开条件的第一阈值；A first threshold for determining whether the leaving condition is met;

用于判断是否满足所述接入条件的第二阈值；a second threshold for determining whether the access condition is met;

用于判断是否满足所述变更条件的第一偏置值。A first offset value is used to determine whether the change condition is met.

在一些实施例中，所述处理器还用于读取所述存储器中的计算机程序并执行以下操作：In some embodiments, the processor is further configured to read the computer program in the memory and perform the following operations:

通过以下方式中的一种或多种配置所述第一阈值：The first threshold is configured by one or more of the following methods:

为每一候选小区或服务小区配置一个所述第一阈值；configuring a first threshold for each candidate cell or serving cell;

为每一候选小区或服务小区的每个波束分别配置一个所述第一阈值；configuring one first threshold for each beam of each candidate cell or serving cell respectively;

为每一候选小区或服务小区的波束配置一个公共的第一阈值；A common first threshold is configured for each candidate cell or beam of the serving cell;

为指定的一个或N个波束配置一个所述第一阈值，其中N大于等于2；configuring the first threshold for the specified one or N beams, where N is greater than or equal to 2;

为每一候选小区或服务小区的N个波束组分别配置一个所述第一阈值，其中N大于等于2。One first threshold is configured for each of the N beam groups of each candidate cell or serving cell, where N is greater than or equal to 2.

在一些实施例中，所述处理器还用于读取所述存储器中的计算机程序并执行以下操作：In some embodiments, the processor is further configured to read the computer program in the memory and perform the following operations:

通过以下方式中的一种或多种配置所述第二阈值：The second threshold is configured by one or more of the following methods:

为每一候选小区配置一个所述第二阈值；configuring one second threshold for each candidate cell;

为每一候选小区的每个波束分别配置一个所述第二阈值；configuring one second threshold for each beam of each candidate cell;

为每一候选小区的波束配置一个公共的第二阈值；configuring a common second threshold for the beam of each candidate cell;

为指定的一个或N个波束配置一个所述第二阈值，其中N大于等于2；configuring the second threshold for the specified one or N beams, where N is greater than or equal to 2;

为每一候选小区的N个波束组分别配置一个所述第二阈值，其中N大于等于2。 One second threshold is configured for each of the N beam groups of each candidate cell, where N is greater than or equal to 2.

在一些实施例中，向终端发送执行条件配置信息之前所述处理器还用于读取所述存储器中的计算机程序并执行以下操作：In some embodiments, before sending the execution condition configuration information to the terminal, the processor is further configured to read the computer program in the memory and perform the following operations:

由所述候选小区所在的网络节点确定和/或生成第一阈值；或，The first threshold is determined and/or generated by a network node where the candidate cell is located; or,

由触发连续条件小区接入的网络节点确定和/或生成第二阈值；或，The second threshold is determined and/or generated by a network node that triggers continuous conditional cell access; or,

由所述候选小区所在的网络节点确定和/或生成第二阈值；或，The second threshold is determined and/or generated by the network node where the candidate cell is located; or,

由触发连续条件小区接入的网络节点确定和/或生成第一偏置值；或，The first offset value is determined and/or generated by a network node that triggers continuous conditional cell access; or,

由所述候选小区所在的网络节点确定和/或生成第一偏置值；或，The first bias value is determined and/or generated by a network node where the candidate cell is located; or,

由配置网络节点来生成第一阈值、第二阈值和/或第一偏置值。The first threshold value, the second threshold value and/or the first offset value are generated by configuring the network node.

第五方面，本公开实施例提供一种连续条件小区接入装置，包括：In a fifth aspect, an embodiment of the present disclosure provides a continuous conditional cell access device, including:

获取模块，用于获取执行条件配置信息；An acquisition module is used to obtain execution condition configuration information;

接入模块，用于基于所述执行条件配置信息从候选小区中确定目标小区并接入所述目标小区；所述执行条件配置信息中包含以下条件中的一种或多种：An access module, configured to determine a target cell from candidate cells based on the execution condition configuration information and access the target cell; the execution condition configuration information includes one or more of the following conditions:

离开服务小区的离开条件；The conditions for leaving the service cell;

接入候选小区的接入条件；Access conditions for accessing candidate cells;

变更小区的变更条件。Change conditions for changing a neighborhood.

在一些实施例中，所述执行条件配置信息具体包含以下配置信息中的一种或多种：In some embodiments, the execution condition configuration information specifically includes one or more of the following configuration information:

用于判断是否满足所述离开条件的第一阈值；A first threshold for determining whether the leaving condition is met;

用于判断是否满足所述接入条件的第二阈值；a second threshold for determining whether the access condition is met;

用于判断是否满足所述变更条件的第一偏置值。A first offset value is used to determine whether the change condition is met.

在一些实施例中，所述接入模块包括：In some embodiments, the access module includes:

判断单元，用于通过以下方式中的一种或多种判断所述候选小区是否满足所述执行条件配置信息中包含的执行条件：A judging unit, configured to judge whether the candidate cell satisfies the execution condition included in the execution condition configuration information by one or more of the following methods:

基于第一阈值判断服务小区是否满足所述离开条件； Determining whether the serving cell satisfies the leaving condition based on a first threshold;

在满足所述离开条件的情况下，基于第二阈值判断所述候选小区是否满足所述接入条件；When the leaving condition is met, determining whether the candidate cell meets the access condition based on a second threshold;

或，or,

基于第二阈值判断所述候选小区是否满足所述接入条件；Determining whether the candidate cell meets the access condition based on a second threshold;

或，or,

基于第一偏置值判断所述候选小区是否满足所述变更条件；Determining whether the candidate cell meets the change condition based on the first offset value;

确定单元，用于确定满足所述执行条件的候选小区为目标小区。The determination unit is used to determine a candidate cell that meets the execution condition as a target cell.

在一些实施例中，所述判断单元包括：In some embodiments, the determining unit includes:

第一确定子单元，用于在满足以下条件中的一个或多个的情况下，确定服务小区满足所述离开条件：The first determining subunit is configured to determine that the serving cell satisfies the leaving condition when one or more of the following conditions are met:

服务小区的信号质量低于第一阈值；The signal quality of the serving cell is lower than a first threshold;

服务小区的服务波束的信号质量低于第一阈值；The signal quality of the serving beam of the serving cell is lower than a first threshold;

服务小区的连续N个服务波束的信号质量均低于第一阈值，其中N大于等于2；The signal qualities of N consecutive serving beams of the serving cell are all lower than a first threshold, where N is greater than or equal to 2;

服务小区的连续N个服务波束的信号质量分别低于对应的第一阈值，其中N大于等于2；The signal qualities of N consecutive serving beams of the serving cell are respectively lower than corresponding first thresholds, where N is greater than or equal to 2;

服务小区扫描到的N个波束的信号质量均低于第一阈值，其中N大于等于2；The signal qualities of N beams scanned by the serving cell are all lower than a first threshold, where N is greater than or equal to 2;

服务小区扫描到的N个波束的信号质量分别低于对应的第一阈值，其中N大于等于2；The signal qualities of the N beams scanned by the serving cell are respectively lower than the corresponding first thresholds, where N is greater than or equal to 2;

服务小区的连续N个波束信号质量的均值低于第一阈值，其中N大于等于2；The average of the signal qualities of N consecutive beams of the serving cell is lower than a first threshold, where N is greater than or equal to 2;

服务小区扫描到的N个波束的信号质量的均值低于第一阈值，其中N大于等于2。An average of the signal qualities of N beams scanned by the serving cell is lower than a first threshold, where N is greater than or equal to 2.

在一些实施例中，所述判断单元还包括：In some embodiments, the determining unit further includes:

第二确定子单元，用于在满足以下条件中的一个或多个的情况下，确定所述候选小区满足所述接入条件： The second determining subunit is configured to determine that the candidate cell meets the access condition when one or more of the following conditions are met:

候选小区的信号质量高于或等于第二阈值；The signal quality of the candidate cell is higher than or equal to a second threshold;

侯选小区的测量到的波束信号质量高于或等于第二阈值；The measured beam signal quality of the candidate cell is higher than or equal to a second threshold;

侯选小区的测量到的信号质量最好的波束信号质量高于或等于第二阈值；The signal quality of the beam with the best signal quality measured in the candidate cell is higher than or equal to the second threshold;

侯选小区的测量到的至少N个波束信号质量均高于或等于第二阈值，其中N大于等于2；The measured signal qualities of at least N beams of the candidate cell are all higher than or equal to a second threshold, where N is greater than or equal to 2;

侯选小区的测量到的至少N个波束信号质量分别高于或等于对应的第二阈值，其中N大于等于2；The measured signal qualities of at least N beams of the candidate cell are respectively higher than or equal to the corresponding second threshold, where N is greater than or equal to 2;

侯选小区的至少N个信号质量最好的波束信号质量均高于或等于第二阈值，其中N大于等于2；The signal qualities of at least N beams with the best signal qualities of the candidate cells are all higher than or equal to a second threshold, where N is greater than or equal to 2;

侯选小区的至少N个信号质量最好的波束信号质量分别高于或等于对应的第二阈值，其中N大于等于2；The signal qualities of at least N beams with the best signal qualities of the candidate cells are respectively higher than or equal to the corresponding second thresholds, where N is greater than or equal to 2;

侯选小区的测量到的N个波束的信号质量的均值高于或等于第二阈值，其中N大于等于2；An average of the signal qualities of N beams measured by the candidate cell is greater than or equal to a second threshold, where N is greater than or equal to 2;

候选小区的至少N个信号质量最好的波束信号质量的均值高于或等于第二阈值，其中N大于等于2；The average of the signal qualities of at least N beams with the best signal qualities of the candidate cell is greater than or equal to a second threshold, where N is greater than or equal to 2;

满足与一个或两个测量配置标识measID关联的执行条件。The execution conditions associated with one or both measurement configuration identifiers measID are met.

在一些实施例中，还包括识别模块；In some embodiments, further comprising an identification module;

所述识别模块用于通过以下信息中的一种或多种信息识别所述服务波束和/或所述波束：The identification module is used to identify the serving beam and/or the beam through one or more of the following information:

同步信号块SSB索引；Synchronization signal block SSB index;

传输配置指示TCI索引；Transmission Configuration Indicator TCI index;

信道状态信息参考信号CSI-RS索引；Channel state information reference signal CSI-RS index;

CSI-RS集索引。CSI-RS set index.

在一些实施例中，所述判断单元还包括：In some embodiments, the determining unit further includes:

第三确定子单元，用于确定所述候选小区的信号质量与服务小区的信号质量的差值超过第一偏置值。 The third determining subunit is configured to determine whether a difference between the signal quality of the candidate cell and the signal quality of the serving cell exceeds a first offset value.

在一些实施例中，所述第一阈值的配置方式包括以下方式中的一种或多种：In some embodiments, the configuration manner of the first threshold includes one or more of the following manners:

为每一候选小区或服务小区配置一个第一阈值；configuring a first threshold for each candidate cell or serving cell;

为每一候选小区或服务小区的每个波束分别配置一个第一阈值；A first threshold is configured for each beam of each candidate cell or serving cell respectively;

为每一候选小区或服务小区的波束配置一个公共的第一阈值；A common first threshold is configured for each candidate cell or beam of the serving cell;

为指定的一个或N个波束配置一个第一阈值，其中N大于等于2；Configuring a first threshold for a specified one or N beams, where N is greater than or equal to 2;

为每一候选小区或服务小区的N个波束组分别配置一个第一阈值，其中N大于等于2。A first threshold is configured for each of the N beam groups of the candidate cell or the serving cell, where N is greater than or equal to 2.

在一些实施例中，所述第一阈值包括以下值中的一种或多种：In some embodiments, the first threshold comprises one or more of the following values:

绝对阈值；所述绝对阈值是直接配置的；Absolute threshold; the absolute threshold is directly configurable;

相对阈值；所述相对阈值是指通过配置的第二偏置值间接得到的阈值；Relative threshold; the relative threshold refers to a threshold indirectly obtained by configuring the second bias value;

测量配置s-MeasureConfig值。Measurement configuration s-MeasureConfig value.

在一些实施例中，所述第二阈值的配置方式包括以下方式中的一种或多种：In some embodiments, the configuration manner of the second threshold includes one or more of the following manners:

为每一候选小区配置一个第二阈值；configuring a second threshold for each candidate cell;

为每一候选小区的每个波束分别配置一个第二阈值；configuring a second threshold for each beam of each candidate cell;

为每一候选小区的波束配置一个公共的第二阈值；configuring a common second threshold for the beam of each candidate cell;

为指定的一个或N个波束配置一个第二阈值，其中N大于等于2；configuring a second threshold for the specified one or N beams, where N is greater than or equal to 2;

为每一候选小区的N个波束组分别配置一个第二阈值，其中N大于等于2。A second threshold is configured for each of the N beam groups of each candidate cell, where N is greater than or equal to 2.

在一些实施例中，接入模块包括：In some embodiments, the access module includes:

添加单元，用于添加所述目标小区为服务小区；或，an adding unit, configured to add the target cell as a serving cell; or,

变更单元，用于将服务小区变更为目标小区。The changing unit is used to change the serving cell to the target cell.

在一些实施例中，还包括评估单元； In some embodiments, further comprising an evaluation unit;

所述评估单元用于继续基于所述执行条件配置信息进行候选小区执行条件的评估。The evaluation unit is used to continue to evaluate the execution condition of the candidate cell based on the execution condition configuration information.

第六方面，本公开实施例提供一种连续条件小区接入装置，包括：In a sixth aspect, an embodiment of the present disclosure provides a continuous conditional cell access device, including:

发送模块，用于向终端发送执行条件配置信息；所述执行条件配置信息中包含以下条件中的一种或多种：The sending module is used to send execution condition configuration information to the terminal; the execution condition configuration information includes one or more of the following conditions:

离开服务小区的离开条件；The conditions for leaving the service cell;

接入候选小区的接入条件；Access conditions for accessing candidate cells;

变更小区的变更条件。Change conditions for changing a neighborhood.

在一些实施例中，所述执行条件配置信息具体包含以下配置信息中的一种或多种：In some embodiments, the execution condition configuration information specifically includes one or more of the following configuration information:

用于判断是否满足所述离开条件的第一阈值；A first threshold for determining whether the leaving condition is met;

用于判断是否满足所述接入条件的第二阈值；a second threshold for determining whether the access condition is met;

用于判断是否满足所述变更条件的第一偏置值。A first offset value is used to determine whether the change condition is met.

在一些实施例中，还包括第一配置模块；In some embodiments, further comprising a first configuration module;

所述第一配置模块用于通过以下方式中的一种或多种配置所述第一阈值：The first configuration module is used to configure the first threshold in one or more of the following ways:

为每一候选小区或服务小区配置一个所述第一阈值；configuring a first threshold for each candidate cell or serving cell;

为每一候选小区或服务小区的每个波束分别配置一个所述第一阈值；configuring one first threshold for each beam of each candidate cell or serving cell respectively;

为每一候选小区或服务小区的波束配置一个公共的第一阈值；A common first threshold is configured for each candidate cell or beam of the serving cell;

为指定的一个或N个波束配置一个所述第一阈值，其中N大于等于2；configuring the first threshold for the specified one or N beams, where N is greater than or equal to 2;

为每一候选小区或服务小区的N个波束组分别配置一个所述第一阈值，其中N大于等于2。One first threshold is configured for each of the N beam groups of each candidate cell or serving cell, where N is greater than or equal to 2.

在一些实施例中，还包括第二配置模块；In some embodiments, further comprising a second configuration module;

所述第二配置模块用于通过以下方式中的一种或多种配置所述第二阈值： The second configuration module is used to configure the second threshold in one or more of the following ways:

为每一候选小区配置一个所述第二阈值；configuring one second threshold for each candidate cell;

为每一候选小区的每个波束分别配置一个所述第二阈值；configuring one second threshold for each beam of each candidate cell;

为每一候选小区的波束配置一个公共的第二阈值；configuring a common second threshold for the beam of each candidate cell;

为指定的一个或N个波束配置一个所述第二阈值，其中N大于等于2；configuring the second threshold for the specified one or N beams, where N is greater than or equal to 2;

为每一候选小区的N个波束组分别配置一个所述第二阈值，其中N大于等于2。One second threshold is configured for each of the N beam groups of each candidate cell, where N is greater than or equal to 2.

在一些实施例中，还包括：In some embodiments, it also includes:

第一生成模块，用于由所述候选小区所在的网络节点确定和/或生成第一阈值；或，A first generating module is configured to determine and/or generate a first threshold by a network node where the candidate cell is located; or,

第二生成模块，用于由触发连续条件小区接入的网络节点确定和/或生成第二阈值；或，A second generating module is configured to determine and/or generate a second threshold by a network node that triggers continuous conditional cell access; or,

第三生成模块，用于由所述候选小区所在的网络节点确定和/或生成第二阈值；或，A third generating module is configured to determine and/or generate a second threshold by the network node where the candidate cell is located; or,

第四生成模块，用于由触发连续条件小区接入的网络节点确定和/或生成第一偏置值；或，A fourth generating module is configured to determine and/or generate a first offset value by a network node that triggers continuous conditional cell access; or,

第五生成模块，用于由所述候选小区所在的网络节点确定和/或生成第一偏置值；或，A fifth generating module, configured to determine and/or generate a first bias value by a network node where the candidate cell is located; or,

第六生成模块，用于由配置网络节点来生成第一阈值、第二阈值和/或第一偏置值。A sixth generating module is used to generate the first threshold, the second threshold and/or the first offset value by configuring the network node.

第七方面，本公开实施例还提供一种处理器可读存储介质，所述处理器可读存储介质存储有计算机程序，所述计算机程序用于使处理器执行如上所述第一方面或第二方面所述的连续条件小区接入方法。In the seventh aspect, an embodiment of the present disclosure further provides a processor-readable storage medium, wherein the processor-readable storage medium stores a computer program, and the computer program is used to enable the processor to execute the continuous conditional cell access method described in the first aspect or the second aspect as described above.

第八方面，本公开实施例还提供一种计算机可读存储介质，所述计算机可读存储介质存储有计算机程序，所述计算机程序用于使计算机执行如上所述第一方面或第二方面所述的连续条件小区接入方法。In an eighth aspect, an embodiment of the present disclosure further provides a computer-readable storage medium, wherein the computer-readable storage medium stores a computer program, and the computer program is used to enable a computer to execute the continuous conditional cell access method described in the first aspect or the second aspect as described above.

第九方面，本公开实施例还提供一种通信设备可读存储介质，所 述通信设备可读存储介质存储有计算机程序，所述计算机程序用于使通信设备执行如上所述第一方面或第二方面所述的连续条件小区接入方法。In a ninth aspect, the present disclosure also provides a communication device readable storage medium. The communication device readable storage medium stores a computer program, and the computer program is used to enable the communication device to execute the continuous conditional cell access method described in the first aspect or the second aspect.

第十方面，本公开实施例还提供一种芯片产品可读存储介质，所述芯片产品可读存储介质存储有计算机程序，所述计算机程序用于使芯片产品执行如上所述第一方面或第二方面所述的连续条件小区接入方法。In the tenth aspect, the embodiments of the present disclosure further provide a chip product readable storage medium, wherein the chip product readable storage medium stores a computer program, and the computer program is used to enable the chip product to execute the continuous conditional cell access method described in the first aspect or the second aspect as described above.

本公开实施例提供的连续条件小区接入方法、装置及存储介质，基于执行条件配置信息，该执行条件配置信息中包含离开当前服务小区的条件、接入目标候选小区的接入条件和/或变更服务小区的变更条件，判断各候选小区是否满足上述执行条件，若满足执行条件则UE执行小区添加或变更，接入目标候选小区，并继续进行执行条件的评估来进行后续的小区添加和/或变更，实现了连续条件小区的添加和/或变更，简化了连续条件小区添加和/或变更的执行条件判断过程，并降低了执行条件配置的复杂度，减少了信令开销。The continuous conditional cell access method, device and storage medium provided by the embodiments of the present disclosure are based on execution condition configuration information, which includes conditions for leaving the current service cell, access conditions for accessing the target candidate cell and/or change conditions for changing the service cell. It is judged whether each candidate cell meets the above-mentioned execution conditions. If the execution conditions are met, the UE executes cell addition or change, accesses the target candidate cell, and continues to evaluate the execution conditions to perform subsequent cell addition and/or change, thereby realizing the addition and/or change of continuous conditional cells, simplifying the execution condition judgment process of adding and/or changing continuous conditional cells, reducing the complexity of the execution condition configuration, and reducing the signaling overhead.

附图说明BRIEF DESCRIPTION OF THE DRAWINGS

为了更清楚地说明本公开实施例或相关技术中的技术方案，下面将对实施例或相关技术描述中所需要使用的附图作一简单地介绍，显而易见地，下面描述中的附图是本公开的一些实施例，对于本领域普通技术人员来讲，在不付出创造性劳动的前提下，还可以根据这些附图获得其他的附图。In order to more clearly illustrate the technical solutions in the embodiments of the present disclosure or related technologies, the following briefly introduces the drawings required for use in the embodiments or related technical descriptions. Obviously, the drawings described below are some embodiments of the present disclosure. For ordinary technicians in this field, other drawings can be obtained based on these drawings without paying creative work.

图1是本公开实施例提供的连续条件小区接入方法的流程示意图之一；FIG1 is a schematic diagram of a flow chart of a method for continuous conditional cell access provided by an embodiment of the present disclosure;

图2是本公开实施例提供的连续条件小区接入方法的流程示意图之二；FIG2 is a second flow chart of a method for continuous conditional cell access provided by an embodiment of the present disclosure;

图3是本公开实施例提供的一种终端的结构示意图； FIG3 is a schematic diagram of the structure of a terminal provided by an embodiment of the present disclosure;

图4是本公开实施例提供的一种网络设备的结构示意图；FIG4 is a schematic diagram of the structure of a network device provided by an embodiment of the present disclosure;

图5是本公开实施例提供的一种连续条件小区接入装置的结构示意图之一；FIG5 is a schematic diagram of a structure of a continuous conditional cell access device provided by an embodiment of the present disclosure;

图6是本公开实施例提供的一种连续条件小区接入装置的结构示意图之二。FIG6 is a second schematic diagram of the structure of a continuous conditional cell access device provided in an embodiment of the present disclosure.

具体实施方式Detailed ways

当前，对于连续条件小区添加/变更的执行条件配置，若采用CHO/CPAC的A3，A4，A5方式来配置，会有一定的局限性(如若配置单一基于A3，A5的执行条件，则A3，A5的配置门限固定，不会基于服务小区不同而不同)或复杂性(如若配置多个基于A3，A5的执行条件，即基于所有可能的服务小区分别配置不同的执行条件，即遍历方式，则会引入接口以及空口配置的复杂度)。Currently, for the execution condition configuration of adding/changing continuous conditional cells, if the A3, A4, and A5 methods of CHO/CPAC are used for configuration, there will be certain limitations (for example, if a single execution condition based on A3 or A5 is configured, the configuration thresholds of A3 and A5 are fixed and will not vary based on different service cells) or complexity (for example, if multiple execution conditions based on A3 or A5 are configured, that is, different execution conditions are configured based on all possible service cells, that is, a traversal method, which will introduce complexity in the interface and air interface configuration).

所以，相关技术中用于非连续条件小区的添加/变更机制包括CHO机制和CPAC机制。但CHO/CPAC机制并不适用于连续条件小区的添加/变更。若基于CHO/CPAC机制配置单一的执行条件，配置门限不会基于服务小区的不同而不同，这种方式可能导致小区添加/变更过早或过晚，甚至可能导致小区添加/变更失败。若基于CHO/CPAC机制为不同服务小区分别配置不同的执行条件，会提高引入接口和空口配置的复杂度，并使信令开销大大增加。Therefore, the adding/changing mechanisms used for cells with non-continuous conditions in the related art include the CHO mechanism and the CPAC mechanism. However, the CHO/CPAC mechanism is not applicable to the adding/changing of cells with continuous conditions. If a single execution condition is configured based on the CHO/CPAC mechanism, the configuration threshold will not be different based on the different serving cells. This approach may cause the cell to be added/changed too early or too late, or even cause the cell to be added/changed to fail. If different execution conditions are configured for different serving cells based on the CHO/CPAC mechanism, the complexity of the introduction interface and air interface configuration will be increased, and the signaling overhead will be greatly increased.

基于上述技术问题，本公开实施例提出一种连续条件小区接入方法，基于执行条件配置信息，该执行条件配置信息中包含离开当前服务小区的条件、接入目标候选小区的接入条件和/或变更服务小区的变更条件，判断各候选小区是否满足上述执行条件，若满足执行条件则UE执行小区添加或变更，接入目标候选小区，并继续进行执行条件的评估来进行后续的小区添加或变更，实现了连续条件小区的变更，简化了连续条件小区添加或变更的执行条件判断过程，并降低了执行 条件配置的复杂度，减少了信令开销。Based on the above technical problems, the embodiment of the present disclosure proposes a method for continuous conditional cell access, based on execution condition configuration information, the execution condition configuration information includes conditions for leaving the current service cell, access conditions for accessing the target candidate cell and/or change conditions for changing the service cell, to judge whether each candidate cell meets the above execution conditions, if the execution conditions are met, the UE performs cell addition or change, accesses the target candidate cell, and continues to evaluate the execution conditions to perform subsequent cell addition or change, thereby realizing the change of continuous conditional cells, simplifying the execution condition judgment process of adding or changing continuous conditional cells, and reducing the execution time. The complexity of conditional configuration is reduced, and signaling overhead is reduced.

为使本公开实施例的目的、技术方案和优点更加清楚，下面将结合本公开实施例中的附图，对本公开实施例中的技术方案进行清楚、完整地描述，显然，所描述的实施例仅仅是本公开一部分实施例，而不是全部的实施例。基于本公开中的实施例，本领域普通技术人员在没有作出创造性劳动前提下所获得的所有其他实施例，都属于本公开保护的范围。In order to make the purpose, technical solution and advantages of the embodiments of the present disclosure clearer, the technical solution in the embodiments of the present disclosure will be clearly and completely described below in conjunction with the drawings in the embodiments of the present disclosure. Obviously, the described embodiments are only part of the embodiments of the present disclosure, not all of the embodiments. Based on the embodiments in the present disclosure, all other embodiments obtained by ordinary technicians in this field without creative work are within the scope of protection of the present disclosure.

图1是本公开实施例提供的连续条件小区接入方法的流程示意图之一，如图1所示，本公开实施例提供一种连续条件小区接入方法，其执行主体可以为终端，例如，手机等。该方法包括：FIG1 is a flow chart of a method for continuous conditional cell access provided by an embodiment of the present disclosure. As shown in FIG1 , an embodiment of the present disclosure provides a method for continuous conditional cell access, and the execution subject may be a terminal, such as a mobile phone. The method includes:

步骤101、获取执行条件配置信息。Step 101: Obtain execution condition configuration information.

具体地，网络设备向终端发送多个候选小区的执行条件配置信息，终端获取该执行条件配置信息。其中，发送执行条件配置信息的网络设备可以为配置网络节点，即用于发送配置信息的网络节点。Specifically, the network device sends execution condition configuration information of multiple candidate cells to the terminal, and the terminal obtains the execution condition configuration information. The network device that sends the execution condition configuration information may be a configuration network node, that is, a network node for sending configuration information.

步骤102、基于所述执行条件配置信息从候选小区中确定目标小区并接入所述目标小区；所述执行条件配置信息中包含以下条件中的一种或多种：Step 102: Determine a target cell from candidate cells based on the execution condition configuration information and access the target cell; the execution condition configuration information includes one or more of the following conditions:

离开服务小区的离开条件；The conditions for leaving the service cell;

接入候选小区的接入条件；Access conditions for accessing candidate cells;

变更小区的变更条件。Change conditions for changing a neighborhood.

具体地，终端获取该执行条件配置信息后，基于执行条件配置信息判断各候选小区是否满足执行条件，可以将满足条件的候选小区作为目标小区接入，实现小区添加或变更。Specifically, after the terminal obtains the execution condition configuration information, it determines whether each candidate cell meets the execution condition based on the execution condition configuration information, and can access the candidate cell that meets the condition as the target cell to achieve cell addition or change.

其中，执行条件配置信息中包含的执行条件可以为离开条件、接入条件和/或变更条件。离开条件指允许离开当前服务小区的条件，接入条件指允许接入某个候选小区的条件，变更条件指允许服务小区变更为某个候选小区的条件。 The execution condition included in the execution condition configuration information may be a leaving condition, an access condition and/or a change condition. The leaving condition refers to a condition for allowing leaving the current serving cell, the access condition refers to a condition for allowing access to a candidate cell, and the change condition refers to a condition for allowing the serving cell to be changed to a candidate cell.

例如，网络设备向终端发送执行条件配置信息，该执行条件配置信息中包含离开条件和接入条件。终端接收该执行条件配置信息，并基于该执行条件配置信息判断当前服务小区满足离开条件，并判断候选小区1满足接入条件，则终端确定可以离开当前服务小区并接入候选小区1。终端接着进行执行条件的评估，当服务小区即候选小区1满足了离开条件，同时候选小区3满足接入条件，则可以离开当前服务小区并接入候选小区3。For example, the network device sends execution condition configuration information to the terminal, and the execution condition configuration information includes a leaving condition and an access condition. The terminal receives the execution condition configuration information, and based on the execution condition configuration information, determines that the current serving cell meets the leaving condition, and determines that candidate cell 1 meets the access condition, then the terminal determines that it can leave the current serving cell and access candidate cell 1. The terminal then evaluates the execution condition, and when the serving cell, that is, candidate cell 1, meets the leaving condition, and candidate cell 3 meets the access condition, then it can leave the current serving cell and access candidate cell 3.

再例如，网络设备向终端发送执行条件配置信息，该执行条件配置信息中包含离开条件和接入条件。终端接收该执行条件配置信息，并基于该执行条件配置信息判断当前服务小区满足离开条件，并判断候选小区1、候选小区3和候选小区5均满足接入条件，可以从满足接入条件的候选小区中确定目标小区并接入该目标小区。For another example, the network device sends execution condition configuration information to the terminal, and the execution condition configuration information includes a leaving condition and an access condition. The terminal receives the execution condition configuration information, and based on the execution condition configuration information, determines that the current serving cell meets the leaving condition, and determines that candidate cell 1, candidate cell 3, and candidate cell 5 all meet the access condition, and can determine the target cell from the candidate cells that meet the access condition and access the target cell.

再例如，在非DC场景下，网络设备向终端发送执行条件配置信息，该执行条件配置信息中包含接入条件。终端接收该执行条件配置信息，并基于该执行条件配置信息判断候选小区是否满足接入条件。如候选小区1满足接入条件，UE接入候选小区1。然后基于执行条件配置信息继续进行小区变更或下一次的小区添加。For another example, in a non-DC scenario, the network device sends execution condition configuration information to the terminal, and the execution condition configuration information includes access conditions. The terminal receives the execution condition configuration information and determines whether the candidate cell meets the access conditions based on the execution condition configuration information. If candidate cell 1 meets the access conditions, the UE accesses candidate cell 1. Then, the cell change or the next cell addition is continued based on the execution condition configuration information.

再例如，网络设备向终端发送执行条件配置信息，该执行条件配置信息中包含变更条件。终端接收该执行条件配置信息，并基于该执行条件配置信息判断某个候选小区的信号质量好于当前服务小区的信号质量，则UE将服务小区变更为该候选小区。然后UE基于执行条件配置信息继续进行执行条件评估和连续条件小区的接入。For another example, the network device sends execution condition configuration information to the terminal, and the execution condition configuration information includes a change condition. The terminal receives the execution condition configuration information, and based on the execution condition configuration information, determines that the signal quality of a candidate cell is better than the signal quality of the current serving cell, then the UE changes the serving cell to the candidate cell. Then the UE continues to perform execution condition evaluation and access to the continuous condition cell based on the execution condition configuration information.

本公开实施例提供的连续条件小区接入方法，通过获取执行条件配置信息，并基于该执行条件配置信息判断服务小区是否满足离开条件、候选小区是否满足接入条件或是否满足变更条件，并接入满足条件的候选小区，实现连续条件小区添加和/或变更，简化了连续条件小区添加和/或变更的执行条件判断过程，并降低了执行条件配置的复 杂度，减少了信令开销。The continuous conditional cell access method provided by the embodiment of the present disclosure obtains execution condition configuration information, and judges whether the serving cell satisfies the leaving condition, whether the candidate cell satisfies the access condition or whether the change condition is met based on the execution condition configuration information, and accesses the candidate cell that satisfies the condition, thereby realizing continuous conditional cell addition and/or change, simplifying the execution condition judgment process of continuous conditional cell addition and/or change, and reducing the complexity of execution condition configuration. clutter and reduces signaling overhead.

在一些实施例中，所述执行条件配置信息具体包含以下配置信息中的一种或多种：In some embodiments, the execution condition configuration information specifically includes one or more of the following configuration information:

用于判断是否满足所述离开条件的第一阈值；A first threshold for determining whether the leaving condition is met;

用于判断是否满足所述接入条件的第二阈值；a second threshold for determining whether the access condition is met;

用于判断是否满足所述变更条件的第一偏置值。A first offset value is used to determine whether the change condition is met.

具体地，执行条件配置信息中还包括第一阈值、第二阈值和/或第一偏置值。第一阈值用于判断当前服务小区是否满足离开条件，第二阈值用于判断候选小区是否满足接入条件，第一偏置值用于判断候选小区是否满足变更条件。Specifically, the execution condition configuration information also includes a first threshold, a second threshold and/or a first offset value. The first threshold is used to determine whether the current serving cell meets the leaving condition, the second threshold is used to determine whether the candidate cell meets the access condition, and the first offset value is used to determine whether the candidate cell meets the changing condition.

第一阈值可以配置在各候选小区配置中，如无线资源管理(Radio Resource Management，RRM)测量配置中，也可以配置在各候选小区配置的外层，与各候选小区配置信息并行配置。当将测量配置值(s-MeasureConfig)作为第一阈值时，第一阈值配置在各候选小区配置信息中的RRM测量配置中。第二阈值配置在各候选小区配置的外层。第一偏置值可以配置在各候选小区配置信息中，或配置在各候选小区配置的外层。The first threshold value may be configured in each candidate cell configuration, such as in the Radio Resource Management (RRM) measurement configuration, or may be configured in the outer layer of each candidate cell configuration, and configured in parallel with each candidate cell configuration information. When the measurement configuration value (s-MeasureConfig) is used as the first threshold value, the first threshold value is configured in the RRM measurement configuration in each candidate cell configuration information. The second threshold value is configured in the outer layer of each candidate cell configuration. The first offset value may be configured in each candidate cell configuration information, or may be configured in the outer layer of each candidate cell configuration.

在一些实施例中，基于所述执行条件配置信息从候选小区中确定目标小区，包括：In some embodiments, determining a target cell from candidate cells based on the execution condition configuration information includes:

通过以下方式中的一种或多种判断所述候选小区是否满足所述执行条件配置信息中包含的执行条件：Determining whether the candidate cell satisfies the execution condition included in the execution condition configuration information by one or more of the following methods:

基于第一阈值判断服务小区是否满足所述离开条件，在满足所述离开条件的情况下，基于第二阈值判断所述候选小区是否满足所述接入条件；或，Determine whether the serving cell satisfies the leaving condition based on a first threshold, and if the leaving condition is met, determine whether the candidate cell satisfies the access condition based on a second threshold; or,

基于第二阈值判断所述候选小区是否满足所述接入条件；或，Determine whether the candidate cell meets the access condition based on a second threshold; or,

基于第一偏置值判断所述候选小区是否满足所述变更条件；Determining whether the candidate cell meets the change condition based on the first offset value;

确定满足所述执行条件的候选小区为目标小区。 A candidate cell that meets the execution condition is determined as a target cell.

具体地，UE基于所述执行条件配置信息从候选小区中确定目标小区，首先要判断候选小区是否满足执行条件配置信息中包含的执行条件。Specifically, the UE determines the target cell from the candidate cells based on the execution condition configuration information, and first determines whether the candidate cell satisfies the execution condition included in the execution condition configuration information.

一种判断方式是若服务小区满足离开条件，且候选小区满足接入条件，则UE确定满足接入某个候选小区的执行条件。One judgment method is that if the serving cell satisfies the leaving condition and the candidate cell satisfies the access condition, the UE determines that the execution condition for accessing a candidate cell is met.

例如，当离开条件是必需的配置信息时，若配置了离开条件，UE基于第一阈值判断当前服务小区满足离开条件，且基于第二阈值判断有候选小区满足接入条件，则UE确定满足接入某个候选小区的执行条件。如在DC场景下，当变更PSCell(变更SCG)时。For example, when the leaving condition is a required configuration information, if the leaving condition is configured, the UE determines that the current serving cell meets the leaving condition based on the first threshold, and determines that there is a candidate cell that meets the access condition based on the second threshold, then the UE determines that the execution condition for accessing a candidate cell is met. For example, in the DC scenario, when changing the PSCell (changing the SCG).

再例如，当离开条件是可选的配置信息时，若配置了离开条件，并且UE基于第一阈值判断当前服务小区满足离开条件，同时基于第二阈值判断候选小区满足接入条件，则确定满足接入某个候选小区的执行条件。如在DC场景下，当变更PSCell(变更SCG)时。For another example, when the leaving condition is optional configuration information, if the leaving condition is configured, and the UE determines that the current serving cell meets the leaving condition based on the first threshold, and determines that the candidate cell meets the access condition based on the second threshold, then it is determined that the execution condition for accessing a candidate cell is met. For example, in the DC scenario, when changing the PSCell (changing the SCG).

还有一种判断方式是若候选小区满足接入条件，则确定满足接入某个候选小区的执行条件。Another judgment method is to determine that the execution condition for accessing a candidate cell is met if the candidate cell meets the access condition.

例如，UE基于第二阈值判断候选小区是否满足接入条件，若满足即确定满足接入某个候选小区的执行条件。如在非DC场景下，当添加一个SCG时。For example, the UE determines whether the candidate cell meets the access condition based on the second threshold, and if so, determines that the execution condition for accessing a candidate cell is met. For example, in a non-DC scenario, when adding an SCG.

再例如，当离开条件是可选的配置信息时，若没有配置离开条件，且UE基于第二阈值判断目标候选小区满足接入条件，则确定满足接入某个候选小区的执行条件。如在DC场景下，当变更PSCell(变更SCG)时。For another example, when the leaving condition is optional configuration information, if the leaving condition is not configured, and the UE determines that the target candidate cell meets the access condition based on the second threshold, it determines that the execution condition for accessing a candidate cell is met. For example, in a DC scenario, when changing the PSCell (changing the SCG).

还有一种判断方式是若候选小区满足变更条件，则确定满足接入某个候选小区的执行条件。Another judgment method is to determine that the execution condition for accessing a candidate cell is met if the candidate cell meets the change condition.

例如，候选小区的信号质量好于当前服务小区信号质量的差值超过了第一偏置值，则确定满足接入某个候选小区的执行条件。For example, if the difference between the signal quality of the candidate cell and the signal quality of the current serving cell exceeds the first offset value, it is determined that the execution condition for accessing a candidate cell is met.

具体地，UE在判断候选小区满足执行条件配置信息中包含的执 行条件之后，确定满足执行条件的候选小区为目标小区。Specifically, the UE determines that the candidate cell meets the execution condition configuration information. After the execution conditions are met, the candidate cells that meet the execution conditions are determined as the target cells.

例如，UE判断候选小区中的小区1满足接入某个候选小区的执行条件，然后将小区1确定为目标小区执行接入。For example, the UE determines that cell 1 among the candidate cells meets the execution condition for accessing a candidate cell, and then determines cell 1 as the target cell to access.

再例如，UE判断候选小区中的小区1、小区3和小区6满足执行条件，然后从小区1、小区3和小区6中确定将小区1作为目标小区执行接入。这取决于UE实现。For another example, the UE determines that cell 1, cell 3 and cell 6 among the candidate cells meet the execution condition, and then determines to use cell 1 as the target cell to perform access from among cells 1, cell 3 and cell 6. This depends on the UE implementation.

本公开实施例提供的连续条件小区接入方法，基于执行条件配置信息中的离开条件、接入条件和变更条件，通过多种方式确定是否可以执行候选小区的接入，能够灵活应用于多种场景，保障了连续条件小区添加和/或变更过程的稳定进行。The continuous conditional cell access method provided by the embodiment of the present disclosure determines whether access to a candidate cell can be performed in a variety of ways based on the leaving condition, access condition and change condition in the execution condition configuration information. It can be flexibly applied to a variety of scenarios, ensuring the stable progress of the continuous conditional cell addition and/or change process.

在一些实施例中，基于第一阈值判断服务小区是否满足所述离开条件，包括：In some embodiments, judging whether the serving cell satisfies the leaving condition based on the first threshold includes:

在满足以下条件中的一个或多个的情况下，确定服务小区满足所述离开条件：When one or more of the following conditions are met, it is determined that the serving cell meets the leaving condition:

服务小区的信号质量低于第一阈值；The signal quality of the serving cell is lower than a first threshold;

服务小区的服务波束的信号质量低于第一阈值；The signal quality of the serving beam of the serving cell is lower than a first threshold;

服务小区的连续N个服务波束的信号质量均低于第一阈值，其中N大于等于2；The signal qualities of N consecutive serving beams of the serving cell are all lower than a first threshold, where N is greater than or equal to 2;

服务小区的连续N个服务波束的信号质量分别低于对应的第一阈值，其中N大于等于2；The signal qualities of N consecutive serving beams of the serving cell are respectively lower than corresponding first thresholds, where N is greater than or equal to 2;

服务小区扫描到的N个波束的信号质量均低于第一阈值，其中N大于等于2；The signal qualities of N beams scanned by the serving cell are all lower than a first threshold, where N is greater than or equal to 2;

服务小区扫描到的N个波束的信号质量分别低于对应的第一阈值，其中N大于等于2；The signal qualities of the N beams scanned by the serving cell are respectively lower than the corresponding first thresholds, where N is greater than or equal to 2;

服务小区的连续N个波束信号质量的均值低于第一阈值，其中N大于等于2；The average of the signal qualities of N consecutive beams of the serving cell is lower than a first threshold, where N is greater than or equal to 2;

服务小区扫描到的N个波束的信号质量的均值低于第一阈值， 其中N大于等于2。The average of the signal qualities of the N beams scanned by the serving cell is lower than the first threshold, Where N is greater than or equal to 2.

具体地，基于第一阈值有多种方式判断服务小区是否满足所述离开条件，根据第一阈值不同的配置方式，对应的UE通过不同的判断方式判断服务小区是否满足离开条件。Specifically, there are multiple ways to determine whether the serving cell meets the leaving condition based on the first threshold. According to different configuration modes of the first threshold, the corresponding UE determines whether the serving cell meets the leaving condition through different determination modes.

若第一阈值是以小区为单位配置的，即为每一候选小区或服务小区分别配置一个第一阈值，UE通过判断当前服务小区的信号质量低于该服务小区对应的第一阈值，确定满足离开该服务小区的离开条件。If the first threshold is configured in units of cells, that is, a first threshold is configured for each candidate cell or serving cell, the UE determines that the leaving condition for leaving the serving cell is met by judging that the signal quality of the current serving cell is lower than the first threshold corresponding to the serving cell.

例如，当前服务小区为小区1，为其配置的第一阈值为70dBm。UE测量到当前服务小区的信号质量为67dBm，低于其对应的第一阈值，则确定满足离开小区1的离开条件。For example, the current serving cell is cell 1, and the first threshold configured for it is 70 dBm. The UE measures that the signal quality of the current serving cell is 67 dBm, which is lower than the corresponding first threshold, and determines that the leaving condition for leaving cell 1 is met.

若第一阈值是以波束为单位配置的，即为每一候选小区或服务小区的每个波束分别配置一个第一阈值，或为每一候选小区或服务小区的波束配置一个公共的第一阈值，或为指定的某个或某些波束配置一个第一阈值，UE通过判断波束的信号质量低于第一阈值，确定满足离开该服务小区的离开条件。If the first threshold is configured in units of beams, that is, a first threshold is configured for each beam of each candidate cell or service cell, or a common first threshold is configured for the beam of each candidate cell or service cell, or a first threshold is configured for a specified beam or beams, the UE determines that the conditions for leaving the service cell are met by judging that the signal quality of the beam is lower than the first threshold.

例如，当前服务小区为小区1，为小区1的波束配置公共的第一阈值为70dBm，UE测量到当前服务小区的连续多个服务波束或扫描到的多个波束的信号质量均低于70dBm，则确定满足离开该服务小区的离开条件。For example, the current service cell is cell 1, and the common first threshold configured for the beam of cell 1 is 70dBm. If the UE measures that the signal quality of multiple consecutive service beams or multiple scanned beams of the current service cell is lower than 70dBm, it determines that the conditions for leaving the service cell are met.

再例如，当前服务小区为小区1，为小区1的波束分别配置一个第一阈值，UE测量到当前服务小区的连续多个服务波束或扫描到的多个波束的信号质量分别低于各自对应的第一阈值，则确定满足离开该服务小区的离开条件。For another example, the current service cell is cell 1, and a first threshold is configured for each beam of cell 1. If the UE measures that the signal quality of multiple consecutive service beams or multiple scanned beams of the current service cell is lower than their respective corresponding first thresholds, it determines that the conditions for leaving the service cell are met.

再例如，将当前服务小区为小区1，为小区1的波束配置公共的第一阈值为70dBm，UE测量到当前服务小区的连续多个服务波束或扫描到的多个波束的信号质量，并计算这些信号质量的值的平均值，若该平均值低于70dBm，则确定满足离开该服务小区的离开条件。 For another example, the current service cell is cell 1, and the common first threshold configured for the beam of cell 1 is 70dBm. The UE measures the signal quality of multiple consecutive service beams or multiple scanned beams of the current service cell, and calculates the average value of these signal quality values. If the average value is lower than 70dBm, it is determined that the conditions for leaving the service cell are met.

在一些实施例中，基于第二阈值判断所述候选小区是否满足所述接入条件，包括：In some embodiments, judging whether the candidate cell meets the access condition based on the second threshold includes:

在满足以下条件中的一个或多个的情况下，确定所述候选小区满足所述接入条件：When one or more of the following conditions are met, it is determined that the candidate cell meets the access condition:

候选小区的信号质量高于或等于第二阈值；The signal quality of the candidate cell is higher than or equal to a second threshold;

侯选小区的测量到的波束信号质量高于或等于第二阈值；The measured beam signal quality of the candidate cell is higher than or equal to a second threshold;

侯选小区的测量到的信号质量最好的波束信号质量高于或等于第二阈值；The signal quality of the beam with the best signal quality measured in the candidate cell is higher than or equal to the second threshold;

侯选小区的测量到的至少N个波束信号质量均高于或等于第二阈值，其中N大于等于2；The measured signal qualities of at least N beams of the candidate cell are all higher than or equal to a second threshold, where N is greater than or equal to 2;

侯选小区的测量到的至少N个波束信号质量分别高于或等于对应的第二阈值，其中N大于等于2；The measured signal qualities of at least N beams of the candidate cell are respectively higher than or equal to the corresponding second threshold, where N is greater than or equal to 2;

侯选小区的至少N个信号质量最好的波束信号质量均高于或等于第二阈值，其中N大于等于2；The signal qualities of at least N beams with the best signal qualities of the candidate cells are all higher than or equal to a second threshold, where N is greater than or equal to 2;

侯选小区的至少N个信号质量最好的波束信号质量分别高于或等于对应的第二阈值，其中N大于等于2；The signal qualities of at least N beams with the best signal qualities of the candidate cells are respectively higher than or equal to the corresponding second thresholds, where N is greater than or equal to 2;

侯选小区的测量到的N个波束的信号质量的均值高于或等于第二阈值，其中N大于等于2；An average of the signal qualities of N beams measured by the candidate cell is greater than or equal to a second threshold, where N is greater than or equal to 2;

候选小区的至少N个信号质量最好的波束信号质量的均值高于或等于第二阈值，其中N大于等于2；The average of the signal qualities of at least N beams with the best signal qualities of the candidate cell is greater than or equal to a second threshold, where N is greater than or equal to 2;

满足与一个或两个测量配置标识measID关联的执行条件。The execution conditions associated with one or both measurement configuration identifiers measID are met.

具体地，基于第二阈值有多种方式判断服务小区是否满足所述离开条件，根据第二阈值不同的配置方式，对应的UE通过不同的判断方式判断候选小区是否满足接入条件。Specifically, there are multiple ways to determine whether the serving cell meets the leaving condition based on the second threshold. According to different configuration modes of the second threshold, the corresponding UE determines whether the candidate cell meets the access condition through different determination modes.

若第二阈值是以小区为单位配置的，即为每一候选小区配置一个第二阈值，UE通过判断候选小区的信号质量高于或等于第二阈值，确定满足接入该候选小区的接入条件。 If the second threshold is configured in units of cells, that is, a second threshold is configured for each candidate cell, the UE determines that the access condition for accessing the candidate cell is met by judging that the signal quality of the candidate cell is higher than or equal to the second threshold.

例如，候选小区包括小区1、小区2和小区3，为小区1配置的第二阈值为85dBm，为小区2配置的第二阈值为78dBm，为小区3配置的第二阈值为80dBm。UE测量到小区1的信号质量为86dBm，高于85dBm，则确定满足接入小区1的接入条件。For example, the candidate cells include cell 1, cell 2, and cell 3, the second threshold configured for cell 1 is 85 dBm, the second threshold configured for cell 2 is 78 dBm, and the second threshold configured for cell 3 is 80 dBm. The UE measures the signal quality of cell 1 as 86 dBm, which is higher than 85 dBm, and determines that the access condition for accessing cell 1 is met.

若第二阈值是以波束为单位配置的，即为每一候选小区的每个波束分别配置一个第二阈值，或为每一候选小区的波束配置一个公共的第二阈值，或为指定的某个或某些波束配置一个第二阈值，UE通过判断波束的信号质量高于或等于第二阈值，确定满足接入该候选小区的接入条件。If the second threshold is configured in units of beams, that is, a second threshold is configured for each beam of each candidate cell, or a common second threshold is configured for the beam of each candidate cell, or a second threshold is configured for a specified beam or beams, the UE determines that the access conditions for accessing the candidate cell are met by judging that the signal quality of the beam is higher than or equal to the second threshold.

例如，为候选小区中的小区1的波束分别配置一个第二阈值，UE测量到小区1的一个或多个波束的信号质量分别高于或等于各自对应的第二阈值，或测量到小区1的一个或多个信号质量最好的波束的信号质量分别高于或等于对应的第二阈值，则确定满足接入该候选小区的接入条件。For example, a second threshold is configured for each beam of cell 1 in the candidate cell. If the UE measures that the signal quality of one or more beams of cell 1 is higher than or equal to the corresponding second threshold, or measures that the signal quality of one or more beams with the best signal quality in cell 1 is higher than or equal to the corresponding second threshold, then it is determined that the access conditions for accessing the candidate cell are met.

再例如，为候选小区中的小区1的波束配置一个公共的第二阈值，UE测量到小区1的一个或多个波束的信号质量均高于或等于此公共的第二阈值，或计算测量到小区1的一个或多个波束的信号质量的平均值，该平均值高于或等于公共的第二阈值，则确定满足接入该候选小区的接入条件。For another example, a common second threshold is configured for the beam of cell 1 in the candidate cell. If the signal quality of one or more beams of cell 1 measured by the UE is higher than or equal to the common second threshold, or the average value of the signal quality of one or more beams of cell 1 is calculated and the average value is higher than or equal to the common second threshold, it is determined that the access conditions for accessing the candidate cell are met.

其中，UE测量的多个波束的具体数量可以设置一个最低值，即对至少N个波束的信号质量进行判断，N为大于等于2的正整数，可根据实际情况取值，从而保证判断结果的准确性。Among them, the specific number of multiple beams measured by the UE can be set to a minimum value, that is, the signal quality of at least N beams is judged, N is a positive integer greater than or equal to 2, and the value can be taken according to the actual situation to ensure the accuracy of the judgment result.

在一些实施例中，通过以下信息中的一种或多种信息识别所述服务波束和/或所述波束：In some embodiments, the serving beam and/or the beam is identified by one or more of the following information:

同步信号块SSB索引；Synchronization signal block SSB index;

传输配置指示TCI索引；Transmission Configuration Indicator TCI index;

信道状态信息参考信号CSI-RS索引； Channel state information reference signal CSI-RS index;

CSI-RS集索引。CSI-RS set index.

具体地，终端可以通过同步信号块(Synchronization Signal and PBCH Block，SSB)索引(SSB index)、传输配置指示(Transmission Configuration Indication，TCI)索引(TCI index)、信道状态信息参考信号(Channel State Information-Reference Signal，CSI-RS)索引(CSI-RS index)和/或CSI-RS集索引(CSI-RS SET index)来识别是哪个波束，识别的波束包括服务小区的服务波束、服务小区扫描到的波束、侯选小区的测量到的波束等。Specifically, the terminal can identify which beam it is through the synchronization signal block (Synchronization Signal and PBCH Block, SSB) index (SSB index), the transmission configuration indication (Transmission Configuration Indication, TCI) index (TCI index), the channel state information reference signal (Channel State Information Reference Signal, CSI-RS) index (CSI-RS index) and/or the CSI-RS set index (CSI-RS SET index). The identified beams include the service beam of the serving cell, the beam scanned by the serving cell, the measured beam of the candidate cell, etc.

在一些实施例中，基于第一偏置值判断所述候选小区是否满足所述变更条件，包括：In some embodiments, judging whether the candidate cell satisfies the change condition based on the first offset value includes:

所述候选小区的信号质量与服务小区的信号质量的差值超过第一偏置值。The difference between the signal quality of the candidate cell and the signal quality of the serving cell exceeds a first offset value.

具体地，UE获取的执行条件配置信息中包含第一配置值，UE基于第一偏置值判断所述候选小区是否满足所述变更条件。即判断候选小区的信号质量好于服务小区的信号质量，且候选小区的信号质量与服务小区的信号质量的差值超过第一偏置值。Specifically, the execution condition configuration information obtained by the UE includes a first configuration value, and the UE determines whether the candidate cell meets the change condition based on the first bias value, that is, it is determined that the signal quality of the candidate cell is better than the signal quality of the serving cell, and the difference between the signal quality of the candidate cell and the signal quality of the serving cell exceeds the first bias value.

其中，第一偏置值offset1可以配置在各候选小区和/或服务小区的配置信息中或各候选小区的配置信息外。The first offset value offset1 may be configured in the configuration information of each candidate cell and/or serving cell or outside the configuration information of each candidate cell.

例如，第一偏置值offset1配置在服务小区的配置信息中时，从服务小区的角度来看，只要某个候选小区的信号质量比当前服务小区信号质量高offset1，那么可以将当前服务小区变更为此候选小区，此种方式对于所有候选小区均用同一个offset1值。For example, when the first offset value offset1 is configured in the configuration information of the serving cell, from the perspective of the serving cell, as long as the signal quality of a candidate cell is higher than the signal quality of the current serving cell by offset1, the current serving cell can be changed to this candidate cell. This method uses the same offset1 value for all candidate cells.

再例如，offset1配置在各候选小区的配置信息外时，从各候选小区的角度，只要某个候选小区的信号质量好于当前服务小区，那么可以将当前服务小区变更为此候选小区。此种方式对于不同候选小区可以配置不同的offset1值；也可以为每个候选小区针对不同的服务小区配置不同的offset1值，即为每个候选小区配置一个第一偏置值列 表(offset1list)，即该每个候选小区的第一偏置值列表中不同的服务小区对应不同的offset1值。For another example, when offset1 is configured outside the configuration information of each candidate cell, from the perspective of each candidate cell, as long as the signal quality of a candidate cell is better than that of the current serving cell, the current serving cell can be changed to this candidate cell. In this way, different offset1 values can be configured for different candidate cells; different offset1 values can also be configured for each candidate cell for different serving cells, that is, a first offset value list is configured for each candidate cell. Table (offset1list), that is, different serving cells in the first offset value list of each candidate cell correspond to different offset1 values.

在一些实施例中，所述第一阈值的配置方式包括以下方式中的一种或多种：In some embodiments, the configuration manner of the first threshold includes one or more of the following manners:

为每一候选小区或服务小区配置一个第一阈值；Configuring a first threshold for each candidate cell or serving cell;

为每一候选小区或服务小区的每个波束分别配置一个第一阈值；A first threshold is configured for each beam of each candidate cell or serving cell respectively;

为每一候选小区或服务小区的波束配置一个公共的第一阈值；A common first threshold is configured for each candidate cell or beam of the serving cell;

为指定的一个或N个波束配置一个第一阈值，其中N大于等于2；Configuring a first threshold for a specified one or N beams, where N is greater than or equal to 2;

为每一候选小区或服务小区的N个波束组分别配置一个第一阈值，其中N大于等于2。A first threshold is configured for each of the N beam groups of the candidate cell or the serving cell, where N is greater than or equal to 2.

具体地，网络设备在向终端发送执行条件配置信息之前，需要先为候选小区或服务小区配置对应的第一阈值，配置方式有多种。Specifically, before the network device sends the execution condition configuration information to the terminal, it needs to configure the corresponding first threshold for the candidate cell or the serving cell, and there are multiple configuration methods.

例如，网络设备可以以小区为单位配置第一阈值，即为每一候选小区或服务小区分别配置一个第一阈值，当判断当前服务小区的信号质量低于其对应的第一阈值时，确定当前服务小区满足离开条件。For example, the network device may configure the first threshold in units of cells, that is, configure a first threshold for each candidate cell or service cell. When it is determined that the signal quality of the current service cell is lower than the corresponding first threshold, it is determined that the current service cell meets the leaving condition.

再例如，网络设备可以以波束为单位配置第一阈值，如为每一候选小区或服务小区的每个波束分别配置一个第一阈值，当判断当前服务小区的波束的信号质量均低于各自对应的第一阈值时，确定当前服务小区满足离开条件。For another example, the network device can configure the first threshold in units of beams, such as configuring a first threshold for each beam of each candidate cell or service cell. When it is determined that the signal quality of the beams of the current service cell is lower than the corresponding first thresholds, it is determined that the current service cell meets the leaving conditions.

再例如，网络设备可以以波束为单位配置第一阈值，如为每一候选小区或服务小区的波束配置一个公共的第一阈值，当判断当前服务小区的波束的信号质量均低于公共的第一阈值时，或者当前服务小区的波束的信号质量的平均值低于公共的第一阈值时，确定当前服务小区满足离开条件。For another example, the network device can configure the first threshold in units of beams, such as configuring a common first threshold for the beams of each candidate cell or service cell. When it is determined that the signal quality of the beams of the current service cell is lower than the common first threshold, or when the average value of the signal quality of the beams of the current service cell is lower than the common first threshold, it is determined that the current service cell meets the leaving condition.

再例如，网络设备可以为指定的一个或多个波束配置一个第一阈值，如果服务波束为指定的一个或多个波束，则第一阈值即为指定的 一个或多个波束配置，否则为公共阈值。For another example, the network device may configure a first threshold for the specified one or more beams. If the service beam is the specified one or more beams, the first threshold is the specified One or more beam configurations, otherwise a common threshold.

再例如，网络设备可以以波束组为单位配置第一阈值，即可以将连续服务的多个波束或者可以扫描到的多个波束进行分组，为每一波束组分别配置一个第一阈值，可以取波束组的各波束信号质量的平均值与该波束组的第一阈值进行比较，也可以将波束组的所有波束的信号质量与该波束组的第一阈值进行比较。For another example, the network device can configure the first threshold in units of beam groups, that is, multiple beams that are continuously served or multiple beams that can be scanned can be grouped, and a first threshold can be configured for each beam group. The average value of the signal quality of each beam in the beam group can be compared with the first threshold of the beam group, or the signal quality of all beams in the beam group can be compared with the first threshold of the beam group.

可选地，由所述候选小区所在的网络节点确定和/或生成第一阈值。例如，候选小区所在的网络节点确定第一阈值的取值，和/或候选小区所在的网络节点生成第一阈值配置信息。Optionally, the first threshold is determined and/or generated by the network node where the candidate cell is located. For example, the network node where the candidate cell is located determines the value of the first threshold, and/or the network node where the candidate cell is located generates the first threshold configuration information.

可选地，由触发连续条件小区接入的网络节点确定和/或生成第二阈值，或由所述候选小区所在的网络节点确定和/或生成第二阈值。Optionally, the second threshold is determined and/or generated by a network node that triggers continuous conditional cell access, or is determined and/or generated by a network node where the candidate cell is located.

可选地，由触发连续条件小区接入的网络节点确定和/或生成第一偏置值，或由所述候选小区所在的网络节点确定和/或生成第一偏置值。Optionally, the first offset value is determined and/or generated by a network node that triggers continuous conditional cell access, or is determined and/or generated by a network node where the candidate cell is located.

可选地，第一阈值、第二阈值和/或第一偏置值还可以由配置网络节点来生成。Optionally, the first threshold, the second threshold and/or the first offset value may also be generated by configuring the network node.

阈值的确定和生成可能由相同的节点完成，也可能由不同的节点完成。例如，由节点1决定阈值，并发送给节点2，由节点2生成这个阈值的配置信息，生成的节点与发送的节点可能不一样，可以是节点2发，也可能是节点1确定和生成，发给节点2，节点2透传给UEThe determination and generation of the threshold may be completed by the same node or by different nodes. For example, the threshold is determined by node 1 and sent to node 2, and node 2 generates the configuration information of the threshold. The generating node may be different from the sending node. It may be sent by node 2, or it may be determined and generated by node 1, sent to node 2, and node 2 transparently transmits it to the UE.

在一些实施例中，所述第一阈值包括以下值中的一种或多种：In some embodiments, the first threshold comprises one or more of the following values:

绝对阈值；所述绝对阈值是直接配置的；Absolute threshold; the absolute threshold is directly configurable;

相对阈值；所述相对阈值是指通过配置的第二偏置值间接得到的阈值；Relative threshold; the relative threshold refers to a threshold indirectly obtained by configuring the second bias value;

测量配置s-MeasureConfig值。Measurement configuration s-MeasureConfig value.

具体地，第一阈值可以为绝对(直接)阈值，即第一阈值由网络设备直接生成并发送。 Specifically, the first threshold may be an absolute (direct) threshold, that is, the first threshold is directly generated and sent by the network device.

第一阈值也可以是相对(间接)阈值，例如相对于测量配置s-MeasureConfig，网络设备配置第二偏置值offset2，则第一阈值取值为s-MeasureConfig+/-offset2；即第一阈值是间接配置的值，第一阈值的值等于显示配置的s-MeasureConfig值加上或减去显示配置的offset2值。The first threshold may also be a relative (indirect) threshold. For example, relative to the measurement configuration s-MeasureConfig, the network device configures the second offset value offset2, then the first threshold is s-MeasureConfig+/-offset2; that is, the first threshold is an indirectly configured value, and the value of the first threshold is equal to the s-MeasureConfig value of the displayed configuration plus or minus the offset2 value of the displayed configuration.

第一阈值也可以是s-MeasureConfig，即隐示的阈值，RRM测量配置中的s-MeasureConfig原本用于控制当SpCell的信号质量低于一个阈值，开启非服务小区测量，在本方案中，可以将它作为第一阈值用于控制和判断UE是否满足离开当前服务小区的条件。The first threshold may also be s-MeasureConfig, that is, an implicit threshold. The s-MeasureConfig in the RRM measurement configuration is originally used to control the start of non-service cell measurement when the signal quality of SpCell is lower than a threshold. In this solution, it can be used as the first threshold to control and determine whether the UE meets the conditions for leaving the current service cell.

在一些实施例中，所述第二阈值的配置方式包括以下方式中的一种或多种：In some embodiments, the configuration manner of the second threshold includes one or more of the following manners:

为每一候选小区配置一个第二阈值；configuring a second threshold for each candidate cell;

为每一候选小区的每个波束分别配置一个第二阈值；configuring a second threshold for each beam of each candidate cell;

为每一候选小区的波束配置一个公共的第二阈值；configuring a common second threshold for the beam of each candidate cell;

为指定的一个或N个波束配置一个第二阈值，其中N大于等于2；configuring a second threshold for the specified one or N beams, where N is greater than or equal to 2;

为每一候选小区的N个波束组分别配置一个第二阈值，其中N大于等于2。A second threshold is configured for each of the N beam groups of each candidate cell, where N is greater than or equal to 2.

具体地，网络设备在向终端发送执行条件配置信息之前，需要先为候选小区或服务小区配置对应的第二阈值，配置方式有多种。Specifically, before the network device sends the execution condition configuration information to the terminal, it needs to configure the corresponding second threshold for the candidate cell or the serving cell, and there are multiple configuration methods.

例如，网络设备可以以小区为单位配置第二阈值，即为每一候选小区配置一个第二阈值，当判断候选小区的信号质量高于或等于其对应的第二阈值时，确定该候选小区满足接入条件。For example, the network device may configure the second threshold in units of cells, that is, configure a second threshold for each candidate cell, and when it is determined that the signal quality of the candidate cell is higher than or equal to the corresponding second threshold, the candidate cell is determined to meet the access condition.

再例如，网络设备可以以波束为单位配置第二阈值，如为每一候选小区的每个波束分别配置一个第二阈值，当判断候选小区的波束的信号质量均高于或等于各自对应的第二阈值时，确定该候选小区满足接入条件。 For another example, the network device can configure the second threshold in units of beams, such as configuring a second threshold for each beam of each candidate cell. When it is determined that the signal quality of the beams of the candidate cells are higher than or equal to their respective corresponding second thresholds, it is determined that the candidate cell meets the access conditions.

再例如，网络设备可以以波束为单位配置第二阈值，如为每一候选小区的波束配置一个公共的第一阈值，当判断候选小区的波束的信号质量均高于或等于公共的第二阈值时，或者候选小区的波束的信号质量的平均值高于或等于公共的第二阈值时，或者候选小区的信号质量最好的一个或多个波束的信号质量高于或等于公共的第二阈值时，或者候选小区的信号质量最好的一个或多个波束的信号质量的平均值高于或等于公共的第二阈值时，确定候选小区满足接入条件。For another example, the network device may configure the second threshold in units of beams, such as configuring a common first threshold for the beams of each candidate cell. When it is determined that the signal qualities of the beams of the candidate cells are all higher than or equal to the common second threshold, or the average value of the signal qualities of the beams of the candidate cells is higher than or equal to the common second threshold, or the signal quality of one or more beams with the best signal quality of the candidate cell is higher than or equal to the common second threshold, or the average value of the signal quality of one or more beams with the best signal quality of the candidate cell is higher than or equal to the common second threshold, it is determined that the candidate cell meets the access conditions.

再例如，网络设备可以以波束组为单位配置第二阈值，即可以候选小区的多个波束进行分组，为每一波束组分别配置一个第二阈值，可以取波束组的各波束信号质量的平均值与该波束组的第二阈值进行比较，也可以取波束组的信号质量最好的波束的信号质量与该波束组的第二阈值进行比较，也可以将波束组的所有波束的信号质量与该波束组的第二阈值进行比较。For another example, the network device can configure the second threshold in units of beam groups, that is, multiple beams of the candidate cell can be grouped, and a second threshold can be configured for each beam group. The average value of the signal quality of each beam in the beam group can be compared with the second threshold of the beam group, the signal quality of the beam with the best signal quality in the beam group can be compared with the second threshold of the beam group, or the signal quality of all beams in the beam group can be compared with the second threshold of the beam group.

通过多种方式配置第一阈值、第二阈值和第一偏置值，提高了配置方式应用的灵活性，并提高了阈值设置的科学性，从而提升执行条件判断的准确性。By configuring the first threshold, the second threshold and the first offset value in a variety of ways, the flexibility of the configuration method application is improved, and the scientific nature of the threshold setting is improved, thereby improving the accuracy of the execution condition judgment.

可选地，网络设备向终端发送执行条件配置信息之前，所述方法还包括：Optionally, before the network device sends the execution condition configuration information to the terminal, the method further includes:

由所述候选小区所在的网络节点确定和/或生成第一阈值；或，The first threshold is determined and/or generated by a network node where the candidate cell is located; or,

由触发连续条件小区接入的网络节点确定和/或生成第二阈值；或，The second threshold is determined and/or generated by a network node that triggers continuous conditional cell access; or,

由所述候选小区所在的网络节点确定和/或生成第二阈值；或，The second threshold is determined and/or generated by the network node where the candidate cell is located; or,

由触发连续条件小区接入的网络节点确定和/或生成第一偏置值；或，The first offset value is determined and/or generated by a network node that triggers continuous conditional cell access; or,

由所述候选小区所在的网络节点确定和/或生成第一偏置值；或，The first bias value is determined and/or generated by a network node where the candidate cell is located; or,

由配置网络节点来生成第一阈值、第二阈值和/或第一偏置值。The first threshold value, the second threshold value and/or the first offset value are generated by configuring the network node.

例如，第一阈值由候选小区所在的网络节点确定取值，由候选小 区所在的网络节点或配置网络节点生成第一阈值配置信息。For example, the first threshold is determined by the network node where the candidate cell is located. The network node where the zone is located or the configuration network node generates the first threshold configuration information.

确定阈值取值的节点和生成阈值配置信息的节点可以为同一个节点，也可以为不同的节点。The node for determining the threshold value and the node for generating the threshold configuration information may be the same node or different nodes.

例如，节点1决定某个阈值，并发送给节点2，节点2生成这个阈值的配置信息。For example, node 1 determines a threshold and sends it to node 2, and node 2 generates configuration information for this threshold.

再例如，也可以是节点1确定阈值取值和生成阈值配置信息，并发送给节点2，节点2再透传给UE。For another example, node 1 may determine a threshold value and generate threshold configuration information, and send the information to node 2, which then transparently transmits the information to the UE.

在一些实施例中，接入所述目标小区，包括：In some embodiments, accessing the target cell includes:

添加所述目标小区为服务小区；或，adding the target cell as a serving cell; or,

将服务小区变更为目标小区。Change the serving cell to the target cell.

具体地，UE在非DC场景下，收到网络发送的各候选小区的执行条件配置信息，此时UE只需要评估接入候选小区的接入条件，当判断候选小区满足接入条件，则可以将该候选小区作为目标小区，添加为UE的服务小区，即接入该候选小区。Specifically, in a non-DC scenario, the UE receives the execution condition configuration information of each candidate cell sent by the network. At this time, the UE only needs to evaluate the access conditions for accessing the candidate cell. When it is determined that the candidate cell meets the access conditions, the candidate cell can be used as the target cell and added as the UE's service cell, that is, the candidate cell is accessed.

UE在双重连接(Dual Connection，DC)场景下，收到网络发送的各候选小区的执行条件配置信息，UE判断候选小区是否满足执行条件，若满足则将满足执行条件的候选小区作为目标小区进行接入，即将服务小区变更为该候选小区，而UE原来的服务小区在变更之后成为非服务小区。In the dual connection (DC) scenario, the UE receives the execution condition configuration information of each candidate cell sent by the network. The UE determines whether the candidate cell meets the execution condition. If so, the UE accesses the candidate cell that meets the execution condition as the target cell, that is, changes the service cell to the candidate cell, and the UE's original service cell becomes a non-service cell after the change.

在一些实施例中，接入所述目标小区之后，所述方法还包括：In some embodiments, after accessing the target cell, the method further includes:

继续基于所述执行条件配置信息进行候选小区执行条件的评估。Continue to evaluate the execution condition of the candidate cell based on the execution condition configuration information.

具体地，UE在完成一次候选小区的接入之后，UE保留所有候选小区的执行条件配置信息，并继续基于所述执行条件配置信息进行候选小区执行条件的评估，当有候选小区满足执行条件时，可以继续进行小区的添加或变更。Specifically, after the UE completes access to a candidate cell, the UE retains the execution condition configuration information of all candidate cells, and continues to evaluate the execution conditions of the candidate cells based on the execution condition configuration information. When a candidate cell meets the execution conditions, the cell can continue to be added or changed.

本公开实施例提供的连续条件小区接入方法，基于执行条件配置信息，该执行条件配置信息中包含离开当前服务小区的条件、接入目 标候选小区的接入条件和/或变更服务小区的变更条件，判断各候选小区是否满足上述执行条件，若满足执行条件则UE执行小区添加或变更，接入目标候选小区，并继续进行执行条件的评估来进行后续的小区添加和/或变更，实现了连续条件小区的添加和/变更，简化了连续条件小区添加和/或变更的执行条件判断过程，并降低了执行条件配置的复杂度，减少了信令开销。The continuous conditional cell access method provided by the embodiment of the present disclosure is based on execution condition configuration information, which includes the conditions for leaving the current serving cell, the access target, The access conditions of the target candidate cells and/or the change conditions of the serving cells are determined, and whether each candidate cell meets the above execution conditions is determined. If the execution conditions are met, the UE executes cell addition or change, accesses the target candidate cell, and continues to evaluate the execution conditions to perform subsequent cell addition and/or change, thereby realizing the addition and/or change of continuous conditional cells, simplifying the execution condition judgment process of adding and/or changing continuous conditional cells, reducing the complexity of the execution condition configuration, and reducing the signaling overhead.

下面通过具体示例对上述各实施例提供的连续条件小区接入方法进一步说明。The continuous conditional cell access method provided in the above embodiments is further described below through specific examples.

示例1、网络配置的执行条件主要包括如下三种条件：Example 1: The execution conditions of network configuration mainly include the following three conditions:

(1)离开当前服务小区的离开条件(通过第一阈值判断)；(1) a condition for leaving the current serving cell (determined by a first threshold);

(2)接入某个候选小区的接入条件(通过第二阈值或与一个或两个measID关联的执行条件判断)；(2) access conditions for accessing a candidate cell (determined by a second threshold or an execution condition associated with one or two measIDs);

(3)某个候选小区的信号质量好于当前服务小区的信号质量(通过第一偏置值offset1判断)。(3) The signal quality of a candidate cell is better than the signal quality of the current serving cell (determined by the first offset value offset1).

其中，第一阈值可以为阈值1或阈值2(s-MeasureConfig)。第二阈值可以为阈值3。The first threshold may be threshold 1 or threshold 2 (s-MeasureConfig), and the second threshold may be threshold 3.

对于阈值1，网络可以配置在各候选小区配置中，如无线资源管理(Radio Resource Management，RRM)测量配置中，也可以配置在各候选小区配置外层，与各候选小区配置并行配置。For threshold 1, the network can be configured in each candidate cell configuration, such as the Radio Resource Management (RRM) measurement configuration, or it can be configured in the outer layer of each candidate cell configuration and configured in parallel with each candidate cell configuration.

对于阈值2(s-MeasureConfig)，网络可以配置在各候选小区配置信息中的RRM测量配置中。For threshold 2 (s-MeasureConfig), the network may configure it in the RRM measurement configuration in the configuration information of each candidate cell.

对于阈值3，网络配置在各候选小区配置的外层。For threshold 3, the network is configured at the outer layer of each candidate cell configuration.

对于与一个或两个measID关联的执行条件，例如A4事件等，网络配置在各候选小区配置的外层。For execution conditions associated with one or two measIDs, such as A4 events, the network configuration is located outside the configuration of each candidate cell.

对于第一偏置值offset1，网络可以配置在各候选小区配置中，即从服务小区的角度来看，只要某个候选小区的信号质量比当前服务小区信号质量高offset1，那么可以将当前服务小区变更为此候选小区， 此种方式对于所有候选小区均用同一个offset1值；offset1也可以配置在各候选小区配置外，即从各候选小区的角度，只要某个候选小区的信号质量好于当前服务小区，那么可以将当前服务小区变更为此候选小区，此种方式对于不同候选小区可以配置不同的offset1值；offset1也可以配置在各候选小区配置外，为每个候选小区针对不同的服务小区配置不同的offset1值，即为每个候选小区配置一个offset1列表(offset1list)。For the first offset value offset1, the network can configure it in each candidate cell configuration, that is, from the perspective of the serving cell, as long as the signal quality of a candidate cell is higher than the signal quality of the current serving cell by offset1, the current serving cell can be changed to this candidate cell. This method uses the same offset1 value for all candidate cells; offset1 can also be configured outside the configuration of each candidate cell, that is, from the perspective of each candidate cell, as long as the signal quality of a candidate cell is better than that of the current serving cell, the current serving cell can be changed to this candidate cell. In this method, different offset1 values can be configured for different candidate cells; offset1 can also be configured outside the configuration of each candidate cell, and different offset1 values are configured for each candidate cell for different serving cells, that is, an offset1 list (offset1list) is configured for each candidate cell.

具体地，阈值1可以有以下几种级别的配置：Specifically, threshold 1 can be configured at the following levels:

(1)阈值1是为每一小区配置的阈值。即为每个候选小区配置一个阈值1。(1) Threshold 1 is a threshold configured for each cell. That is, a threshold 1 is configured for each candidate cell.

(2)阈值1是为每一波束配置的阈值。即为每个候选小区中的服务波束配置一个阈值1；或者为每个候选小区中N个连续服务波束分别配置一个阈值1，共N个阈值1；或者为每个候选小区中可以扫描到的N个波束分别配置一个阈值1，共N个阈值1。其中，N为大于等于2的自然数。(2) Threshold 1 is a threshold configured for each beam. That is, a threshold 1 is configured for each service beam in a candidate cell; or a threshold 1 is configured for each of N consecutive service beams in each candidate cell, for a total of N thresholds 1; or a threshold 1 is configured for each of the N beams that can be scanned in each candidate cell, for a total of N thresholds 1. Wherein, N is a natural number greater than or equal to 2.

(3)网络配置公共阈值4，并为指定的一个或多个波束配置单独阈值5。如果服务波束为指定的一个或多个波束，则阈值1即为对应的阈值5，否则为公共阈值4。此公共阈值4为每个候选小区中N个连续服务的波束共用的阈值，或者为可以扫描到的N个波束共用的阈值。网络也可以选择一个或多个波束并为其配置单独的阈值5，只有该一个或多个波束才可以/需要使用阈值5。(3) The network configures a common threshold 4 and a separate threshold 5 for the specified one or more beams. If the serving beam is the specified one or more beams, then threshold 1 is the corresponding threshold 5, otherwise it is the common threshold 4. This common threshold 4 is a threshold shared by N consecutive serving beams in each candidate cell, or a threshold shared by N beams that can be scanned. The network can also select one or more beams and configure a separate threshold 5 for them. Only these one or more beams can/need to use threshold 5.

(4)阈值1是为每一波束组配置的阈值。可以将连续服务的N个波束或者可以扫描到的N个波束进行分组，为每个波束组配置一个阈值1。(4) Threshold 1 is a threshold configured for each beam group. N beams that are continuously served or N beams that can be scanned may be grouped, and a threshold 1 may be configured for each beam group.

(5)阈值1可以为绝对(直接)阈值，即阈值1由网络设备直接生成并发送。阈值1也可以是相对(间接)阈值，例如相对于测量配置s-MeasureConfig，网络设备配置第二偏置值offset2，则阈值1取 值为s-MeasureConfig+/-offset2；即阈值1是间接配置的值，阈值1的值等于显示配置的s-MeasureConfig值加上或减去显示配置的offset2值。(5) Threshold 1 can be an absolute (direct) threshold, that is, threshold 1 is directly generated and sent by the network device. Threshold 1 can also be a relative (indirect) threshold, for example, relative to the measurement configuration s-MeasureConfig, the network device configures the second offset value offset2, then threshold 1 is The value is s-MeasureConfig+/-offset2; that is, threshold 1 is the value of the indirect configuration, and the value of threshold 1 is equal to the s-MeasureConfig value of the display configuration plus or minus the offset2 value of the display configuration.

阈值3可以有以下几种级别的配置：Threshold 3 can be configured at the following levels:

(1)阈值3是为每一小区配置的阈值。即为每个候选小区配置一个阈值3。(1) Threshold 3 is a threshold configured for each cell. That is, a threshold 3 is configured for each candidate cell.

(2)阈值3是为每一波束配置的阈值。即为每个候选小区中的服务波束配置一个阈值3；或者为每个候选小区中N个连续服务波束分别配置一个阈值3，共N个阈值3；或者为每个候选小区中可以扫描到的N个波束分别配置一个阈值3，共N个阈值3。其中，N为大于等于2的自然数。(2) Threshold 3 is a threshold configured for each beam. That is, a threshold 3 is configured for each service beam in a candidate cell; or a threshold 3 is configured for each of N consecutive service beams in each candidate cell, for a total of N thresholds 3; or a threshold 3 is configured for each of the N beams that can be scanned in each candidate cell, for a total of N thresholds 3. Wherein, N is a natural number greater than or equal to 2.

(3)网络配置公共阈值6，并为指定一个或多个波束配置单独阈值7，如果测量到的波束为指定的一个或多个波束，则阈值3即为对应的阈值7，否则为公共阈值6。(3) The network configures a common threshold 6 and configures a separate threshold 7 for specifying one or more beams. If the measured beam is the specified one or more beams, threshold 3 is the corresponding threshold 7, otherwise it is the common threshold 6.

(4)阈值3是为每一波束组配置的阈值。可以将连续服务的N个波束或者可以扫描到的N个波束进行分组，为每个波束组配置一个阈值3。(4) Threshold 3 is a threshold configured for each beam group. N beams that are continuously served or N beams that can be scanned can be grouped, and a threshold 3 is configured for each beam group.

其中，上述波束识别方式可以是同步信号块(Synchronization Signal Block，SSB)索引(index)，传输配置指示(Transmission Configuration Indication，TCI)索引，信道状态信息参考信号(Channel State Information-Reference Signal，CSI-RS)索引，CSI-RS集(CSI-RS SET)索引等。Among them, the above-mentioned beam identification method can be a synchronization signal block (Synchronization Signal Block, SSB) index (index), a transmission configuration indication (Transmission Configuration Indication, TCI) index, a channel state information reference signal (Channel State Information-Reference Signal, CSI-RS) index, a CSI-RS set (CSI-RS SET) index, etc.

示例2、当第一阈值为阈值1且第二阈值为阈值3时，基于阈值1判断当前服务小区满足离开条件，并基于阈值3判断满足接入条件的候选小区，从而实现连续条件小区变更的过程如下所示：Example 2: When the first threshold is threshold 1 and the second threshold is threshold 3, the current serving cell is judged to meet the leaving condition based on threshold 1, and the candidate cell that meets the access condition is judged based on threshold 3, so that the process of implementing continuous conditional cell change is as follows:

步骤1：在双重连接(Dual Connection，DC)场景下，UE收到网络设备发送的各候选主辅小区(Primary Secondary Cell，PSCell)的 配置信息及其相应的执行条件信息。Step 1: In the dual connection (DC) scenario, the UE receives the information of each candidate primary secondary cell (PSCell) sent by the network device. Configuration information and its corresponding execution condition information.

例如，UE当前连接的PSCell为PSCell 0。UE接收的各候选PSCell的配置信息主要包括PSCell 1，PSCell 2，PSCell 3，PSCell 4，PSCell 5，PSCell 6一共6个候选PSCell的配置信息。该配置信息中包括阈值1和阈值3，阈值1为离开当前服务小区的离开条件配置信息，阈值3为接入某个候选小区的接入条件配置信息。For example, the PSCell currently connected to the UE is PSCell 0. The configuration information of each candidate PSCell received by the UE mainly includes configuration information of 6 candidate PSCells, namely, PSCell 1, PSCell 2, PSCell 3, PSCell 4, PSCell 5, and PSCell 6. The configuration information includes threshold 1 and threshold 3. Threshold 1 is the leaving condition configuration information for leaving the current serving cell, and threshold 3 is the access condition configuration information for accessing a candidate cell.

其中，阈值1可以配置在当前服务小区的配置信息中，例如RRM测量配置(MeasConfig)中；对于各候选小区，阈值1配置在各候选小区配置信息中，例如RRM测量配置中。Among them, threshold 1 can be configured in the configuration information of the current serving cell, such as the RRM measurement configuration (MeasConfig); for each candidate cell, threshold 1 is configured in the configuration information of each candidate cell, such as the RRM measurement configuration.

阈值1也可以配置在各候选小区配置信息的外层，和各候选小区的其他配置信息或阈值3一同并行配置。阈值3关联候选小区配置信息，可以不包含在候选小区配置信息内。对于阈值1配置在各候选小区配置信息的外层的情况，若网络把PSCell 0配置为其中一个候选小区，那么即用候选小区PSCell 0的阈值1进行是否满足离开条件的判定；若网络没有把PSCell 0配置为其中一个候选小区，那么UE可以忽略阈值1的判断。或如果PSCell 0配置了阈值1，则UE需要评估阈值1；否则只评估阈值3。Threshold 1 may also be configured in the outer layer of each candidate cell configuration information, and configured in parallel with other configuration information of each candidate cell or threshold 3. Threshold 3 is associated with the candidate cell configuration information and may not be included in the candidate cell configuration information. In the case where threshold 1 is configured in the outer layer of each candidate cell configuration information, if the network configures PSCell 0 as one of the candidate cells, then the threshold 1 of the candidate cell PSCell 0 is used to determine whether the leaving condition is met; if the network does not configure PSCell 0 as one of the candidate cells, then the UE can ignore the judgment of threshold 1. Or if PSCell 0 is configured with threshold 1, the UE needs to evaluate threshold 1; otherwise, only threshold 3 is evaluated.

若阈值1配置在各候选小区的配置信息中(如RRM测量配置中)，阈值1可以由各候选小区所在节点进行配置/设置，如在本例中，阈值1可以由目标辅基站/辅节点(Secondary Node，SN)进行配置。各候选小区所在节点可以直接将阈值1包在各候选小区配置中通过Xn或X2接口传给相应的节点或直接发送给UE。若阈值1配置在各候选小区配置信息的外层，阈值1可以由触发节点或目标节点来配置/设置，如在本例中，阈值1可以由源SN、主基站/主节点(Master Node，MN)或目标SN进行配置。If threshold 1 is configured in the configuration information of each candidate cell (such as in the RRM measurement configuration), threshold 1 can be configured/set by the node where each candidate cell is located. For example, in this example, threshold 1 can be configured by the target secondary base station/secondary node (SN). The node where each candidate cell is located can directly include threshold 1 in the configuration of each candidate cell and transmit it to the corresponding node or directly to the UE through the Xn or X2 interface. If threshold 1 is configured in the outer layer of the configuration information of each candidate cell, threshold 1 can be configured/set by the triggering node or the target node. For example, in this example, threshold 1 can be configured by the source SN, the master base station/master node (MN) or the target SN.

对于阈值3的具体配置，可以配置在各候选小区配置信息的外层，和各候选小区配置信息并行配置。阈值3可以由触发节点或目标节点 来配置/设置，例如，阈值3可以由源SN、MN或目标SN进行配置。The specific configuration of threshold 3 can be configured in the outer layer of each candidate cell configuration information and configured in parallel with each candidate cell configuration information. To configure/set, for example, threshold 3 can be configured by the source SN, MN or target SN.

假设各候选小区的阈值1和阈值3的配置信息如下(dBm表示分贝毫瓦)：Assume that the configuration information of threshold 1 and threshold 3 of each candidate cell is as follows (dBm represents decibel milliwatt):

PSCell 1：阈值1＝75dBm，阈值3＝85dBm；PSCell 1: Threshold 1 = 75dBm, Threshold 3 = 85dBm;

PSCell 2：阈值1＝67dBm，阈值3＝78dBm；PSCell 2: Threshold 1 = 67dBm, Threshold 3 = 78dBm;

PSCell 3：阈值1＝70dBm，阈值3＝80dBm；PSCell 3: Threshold 1 = 70dBm, Threshold 3 = 80dBm;

PSCell 4：阈值1＝50dBm，阈值3＝60dBm；PSCell 4: Threshold 1 = 50dBm, Threshold 3 = 60dBm;

PSCell 5：阈值1＝90dBm，阈值3＝112dBm；PSCell 5: Threshold 1 = 90dBm, Threshold 3 = 112dBm;

PSCell 6：阈值1＝100dBm，阈值3＝120dBm。PSCell 6: Threshold 1 = 100dBm, Threshold 3 = 120dBm.

当阈值1配置在各候选小区的配置信息中(RRM测量配置中)时，实现连续条件小区变更的过程如步骤2-1至步骤6-1所示：When threshold 1 is configured in the configuration information of each candidate cell (in the RRM measurement configuration), the process of implementing continuous conditional cell change is shown in steps 2-1 to 6-1:

步骤2-1：UE当前连接在PSCell 0，并进行相应的测量过程，当前PSCell 0的RRM测量配置中配置了阈值1的值为70dBm。Step 2-1: The UE is currently connected to PSCell 0 and performs the corresponding measurement process. The threshold 1 value is configured as 70dBm in the current RRM measurement configuration of PSCell 0.

步骤3-1：当UE测量到当前服务小区的信号质量已经低于70dBm，即满足离开PSCell 0的条件，同时PSCell 3测量的信号质量为85dBm，即满足接入PSCell 3的接入条件。UE判断阈值1和阈值3均满足，应该执行PSCell变更(change)过程，从PSCell 0变更到PSCell 3。Step 3-1: When the UE measures that the signal quality of the current serving cell is lower than 70dBm, it meets the condition for leaving PSCell 0, and the signal quality measured by PSCell 3 is 85dBm, it meets the access condition for accessing PSCell 3. The UE determines that both threshold 1 and threshold 3 are met, and should execute the PSCell change process, changing from PSCell 0 to PSCell 3.

步骤4-1：UE执行PSCell变更过程从PSCell 0变更到PSCell 3，当UE成功接入PSCell 3后，UE保留PSCell 1至PSCell 6即所有候选小区的配置信息，并继续进行评估。Step 4-1: The UE executes the PSCell change process from PSCell 0 to PSCell 3. After the UE successfully accesses PSCell 3, the UE retains the configuration information of PSCell 1 to PSCell 6, that is, all candidate cells, and continues to evaluate.

步骤5-1：当UE检测到当前PSCell 3的信号质量已经低于70dBm，即满足离开PSCell 3的条件，同时PSCell 5测量的信号质量为120dBm,即满足接入PSCell 5的接入条件。UE判断阈值1和阈值3均满足，应该执行PSCell变更过程，从PSCell 3变更到PSCell 5。Step 5-1: When the UE detects that the signal quality of the current PSCell 3 is lower than 70dBm, it meets the conditions for leaving PSCell 3, and the signal quality measured by PSCell 5 is 120dBm, it meets the access conditions for accessing PSCell 5. The UE determines that both threshold 1 and threshold 3 are met, and should execute the PSCell change process, changing from PSCell 3 to PSCell 5.

步骤6-1：UE执行PSCell变更过程从PSCell 3变更到PSCell 5，当UE成功接入PSCell 5后，UE保留PSCell 1至PSCell 6的配置信息，并继续进行评估。 Step 6-1: The UE performs the PSCell change process from PSCell 3 to PSCell 5. After the UE successfully accesses PSCell 5, the UE retains the configuration information of PSCell 1 to PSCell 6 and continues to evaluate.

当阈值1配置在各候选小区配置的外层时，实现连续条件小区变更的过程如步骤2-2至步骤6-2所示：When threshold 1 is configured in the outer layer of each candidate cell configuration, the process of implementing continuous conditional cell change is shown in steps 2-2 to 6-2:

步骤2-2：UE当前连接在PSCell 0，并进行相应的测量过程，当前PSCell 0没有配置阈值1，UE忽略对阈值1的判断。Step 2-2: The UE is currently connected to PSCell 0 and performs the corresponding measurement process. Currently, PSCell 0 is not configured with threshold 1, and the UE ignores the judgment of threshold 1.

步骤3-2：当UE检测到PSCell 3的信号质量为85dBm，即满足接入PSCell 3的接入条件。UE判断应该执行PSCell变更过程，从PSCell 0变更到PSCell 3。Step 3-2: When the UE detects that the signal quality of PSCell 3 is 85dBm, the access condition for accessing PSCell 3 is met. The UE determines that the PSCell change process should be executed, changing from PSCell 0 to PSCell 3.

步骤4-2：UE执行PSCell变更过程从PSCell 0变更到PSCell 3，当UE成功接入PSCell 3后，UE保留PSCell 1至PSCell 6的配置信息，并继续进行评估。Step 4-2: The UE executes the PSCell change process from PSCell 0 to PSCell 3. After the UE successfully accesses PSCell 3, the UE retains the configuration information of PSCell 1 to PSCell 6 and continues the evaluation.

步骤5-2：当UE检测到当前PSCell 3的信号质量已经低于70dBm，即满足离开PSCell 3的条件，同时PSCell 5测量的信号质量为120dBm,即满足接入PSCell 5的接入条件。UE判断阈值1和阈值3均满足，应该执行PSCell变更过程，从PSCell 3变更到PSCell 5。Step 5-2: When the UE detects that the signal quality of the current PSCell 3 is lower than 70dBm, it meets the conditions for leaving PSCell 3, and the signal quality measured by PSCell 5 is 120dBm, it meets the access conditions for accessing PSCell 5. The UE determines that both threshold 1 and threshold 3 are met, and should execute the PSCell change process, changing from PSCell 3 to PSCell 5.

步骤6-2：UE执行PSCell变更过程从PSCell 3变更到PSCell 5，当UE成功接入PSCell 5后，UE保留PSCell 1至PSCell 6的配置信息，并继续进行评估。Step 6-2: The UE executes the PSCell change process from PSCell 3 to PSCell 5. After the UE successfully accesses PSCell 5, the UE retains the configuration information of PSCell 1 to PSCell 6 and continues the evaluation.

当PSCell 0为各候选小区中的一个候选小区，且阈值1配置在各候选小区配置的外层时，实现连续条件小区变更的过程如步骤2-3至步骤6-3所示：When PSCell 0 is one of the candidate cells and threshold 1 is configured in the outer layer of the candidate cell configuration, the process of implementing continuous conditional cell change is shown in steps 2-3 to 6-3:

假设PSCell 0的阈值1＝70dBm，阈值3＝85dBm。Assume that threshold 1 of PSCell 0 is 70dBm and threshold 3 is 85dBm.

步骤2-3：UE当前连接在PSCell 0，并进行相应的测量过程，当前PSCell 0的阈值1使用配置的候选PSCell 0中的阈值1的值，即阈值1的值为70dBm。Step 2-3: The UE is currently connected to PSCell 0 and performs the corresponding measurement process. The threshold 1 of the current PSCell 0 uses the value of threshold 1 in the configured candidate PSCell 0, that is, the value of threshold 1 is 70dBm.

步骤3-3：当UE测量到当前服务小区的信号质量已经低于70dBm，即满足离开PSCell 0的条件，同时PSCell 3测量的信号质量为85dBm，即满足接入PSCell 3的接入条件。UE判断阈值1和阈值3均满足，应该执行PSCell变更过程，从PSCell 0变更到PSCell 3。 Step 3-3: When the UE measures that the signal quality of the current serving cell is lower than 70dBm, it meets the condition for leaving PSCell 0, and the signal quality measured by PSCell 3 is 85dBm, it meets the access condition for accessing PSCell 3. The UE determines that both threshold 1 and threshold 3 are met, and should execute the PSCell change process, changing from PSCell 0 to PSCell 3.

步骤4-3：UE执行PSCell变更过程从PSCell 0变更到PSCell 3，当UE成功接入PSCell 3后，UE保留PSCell 1至PSCell 6的配置信息，并继续进行评估。Step 4-3: The UE executes the PSCell change process from PSCell 0 to PSCell 3. After the UE successfully accesses PSCell 3, the UE retains the configuration information of PSCell 1 to PSCell 6 and continues the evaluation.

步骤5-3：当UE检测到当前PSCell 3的信号质量已经低于70dBm，即满足离开PSCell 3的条件，同时PSCell 5测量的信号质量为120dBm,即满足接入PSCell 5的接入条件。UE判断阈值1和阈值3均满足，应该执行PSCell变更过程，从PSCell 3变更到PSCell 5。Step 5-3: When the UE detects that the signal quality of the current PSCell 3 is lower than 70dBm, it meets the conditions for leaving PSCell 3, and the signal quality measured by PSCell 5 is 120dBm, it meets the access conditions for accessing PSCell 5. The UE determines that both threshold 1 and threshold 3 are met, and should execute the PSCell change process, changing from PSCell 3 to PSCell 5.

步骤6-3：UE执行PSCell变更过程从PSCell 3变更到PSCell 5，当UE成功接入PSCell 5后，UE保留PSCell 1至PSCell 6的配置信息，并继续进行评估。Step 6-3: The UE executes the PSCell change process from PSCell 3 to PSCell 5. After the UE successfully accesses PSCell 5, the UE retains the configuration information of PSCell 1 to PSCell 6 and continues the evaluation.

需要说明的是，上述阈值1和阈值3除了可以是对每一小区(per cell)的配置，还可以是对每一小区的每一波束(per beam)的配置，或者每一小区的每一组波束(per multiple beam)的配置，具体如下。It should be noted that, in addition to being the configuration for each cell (per cell), the above threshold 1 and threshold 3 can also be the configuration for each beam of each cell (per beam) or the configuration for each group of beams of each cell (per multiple beam), as follows.

对于阈值1，UE满足离开当前服务小区的条件包括如下一种或多种：For threshold 1, the conditions for the UE to leave the current serving cell include one or more of the following:

(1)当前服务小区的信号质量低于阈值1；(1) The signal quality of the current serving cell is lower than threshold 1;

(2)当前服务小区的服务波束信号质量低于阈值1；(2) The service beam signal quality of the current serving cell is lower than threshold 1;

(3)当前服务小区的连续N(N为大于等于2的自然数)个波束信号质量均低于阈值1或分别低于对应的阈值1；(3) The signal qualities of N consecutive beams (N is a natural number greater than or equal to 2) of the current serving cell are all lower than threshold 1 or are lower than the corresponding threshold 1 respectively;

(4)当前服务小区的扫描到的N个波束信号质量均低于阈值1或分别低于对应的阈值1；(4) The signal qualities of the N scanned beams of the current serving cell are all lower than threshold 1 or lower than the corresponding threshold 1 respectively;

(5)当前服务小区的连续N个服务波束信号质量的均值低于阈值1；(5) The average of the signal qualities of N consecutive service beams of the current serving cell is lower than the threshold 1;

(6)当前服务小区的扫描到的N个波束信号质量的均值低于阈值1。(6) The average quality of the N scanned beam signals of the current serving cell is lower than the threshold 1.

对于阈值3，UE满足接入一个候选小区的条件包括如下一种或多种： For threshold 3, the conditions that the UE meets to access a candidate cell include one or more of the following:

(1)此候选小区的信号质量高于/等于阈值3；(1) The signal quality of the candidate cell is higher than/equal to threshold 3;

(2)此侯选小区的测量到的波束/所测量到的信号质量最好的波束信号质量高于/等于阈值3；(2) The signal quality of the measured beam/the beam with the best measured signal quality of the candidate cell is higher than/equal to threshold 3;

(3)此侯选小区的测量到的至少N个波束信号质量均高于/等于阈值3或分别高于/等于对应的阈值3；(3) The signal qualities of at least N beams measured for the candidate cell are all higher than/equal to threshold 3 or higher than/equal to the corresponding threshold 3;

(4)此侯选小区的至少N个测量到的最好波束信号质量高于/等于阈值3或分别高于/等于对应的阈值3；(4) The quality of at least N best beam signals measured for the candidate cell is higher than/equal to threshold 3 or higher than/equal to the corresponding threshold 3;

(5)此侯选小区的测量到的N个波束信号质量的均值高于/等于阈值3；(5) The average of the N beam signal qualities measured for the candidate cell is greater than or equal to a threshold of 3;

(6)此候选小区的至少N个测量到的最好波束信号质量的均值高于/等于阈值3；(6) The average of the best beam signal qualities of at least N measured values of the candidate cell is greater than or equal to a threshold of 3;

对于为每一小区的每一波束或每一小区的每一组波束配置阈值的情况，根据阈值评估各条件的具体的实施方式，同上述为每一小区配置阈值的情况下的实施方式，此处不再赘述。For the case of configuring a threshold for each beam of each cell or each group of beams of each cell, the specific implementation method of evaluating each condition according to the threshold is the same as the implementation method for configuring the threshold for each cell mentioned above, and will not be repeated here.

对于具体的波束级阈值1和阈值3的配置，见上述实施例1中的描述，此处不再赘述。For the specific configuration of the beam level threshold 1 and the threshold 3, refer to the description in the above-mentioned embodiment 1, which will not be repeated here.

示例3、当第一阈值为阈值2且第二阈值为阈值3时，基于阈值2判断当前候选小区满足离开条件，并基于阈值3判断满足接入条件的候选小区，从而实现连续条件小区变更的过程如下所示：Example 3: When the first threshold is threshold 2 and the second threshold is threshold 3, the current candidate cell is judged to meet the leaving condition based on threshold 2, and the candidate cell that meets the access condition is judged based on threshold 3, so that the process of implementing continuous conditional cell change is as follows:

步骤1：在双重连接(Dual Connection，DC)场景下，UE收到网络设备发送的各候选主辅小区(Primary Secondary Cell，PSCell)的配置信息及其相应的执行条件信息。Step 1: In the dual connection (DC) scenario, the UE receives the configuration information of each candidate primary secondary cell (PSCell) and its corresponding execution condition information sent by the network device.

UE当前连接的PSCell为PSCell 0。UE接收的各候选PSCell的配置信息主要包括PSCell 1，PSCell 2，PSCell 3，PSCell 4，PSCell 5，PSCell 6一共6个候选PSCell的配置信息。该配置信息中包括阈值2和阈值3，阈值2为离开当前服务小区的离开条件配置信息，阈值3为接入某个候选小区的接入条件配置信息。 The PSCell to which the UE is currently connected is PSCell 0. The configuration information of each candidate PSCell received by the UE mainly includes configuration information of a total of 6 candidate PSCells, namely, PSCell 1, PSCell 2, PSCell 3, PSCell 4, PSCell 5, and PSCell 6. The configuration information includes threshold 2 and threshold 3, where threshold 2 is the leaving condition configuration information for leaving the current serving cell, and threshold 3 is the access condition configuration information for accessing a candidate cell.

其中，阈值2即s-MeasureConfig，s-MeasureConfig被配置在各候选小区配置信息中的RRM测量配置中。与阈值1不同的是，阈值1是新引入的一个显示的阈值，但是阈值2是隐示的阈值。当前RRM测量配置中的s-MeasureConfig原本用于控制当SpCell的信号质量低于一个阈值，开启非服务小区测量，现可以将它作为阈值2用于控制和判断UE是否满足离开当前服务小区的条件。Among them, threshold 2 is s-MeasureConfig, and s-MeasureConfig is configured in the RRM measurement configuration in the configuration information of each candidate cell. Unlike threshold 1, threshold 1 is a newly introduced displayed threshold, but threshold 2 is an implicit threshold. The s-MeasureConfig in the current RRM measurement configuration was originally used to control the start of non-serving cell measurement when the signal quality of SpCell is lower than a threshold. Now it can be used as threshold 2 to control and determine whether the UE meets the conditions for leaving the current serving cell.

阈值3可以配置在各候选小区配置信息的外层，和各候选小区配置信息并行配置。阈值3可以由触发节点或目标节点来配置/设置，例如，阈值3可以由源SN、MN或目标SN进行配置。Threshold 3 can be configured in the outer layer of each candidate cell configuration information and configured in parallel with each candidate cell configuration information. Threshold 3 can be configured/set by a triggering node or a target node, for example, threshold 3 can be configured by a source SN, MN or target SN.

假设各候选小区的阈值3的配置信息如下：Assume that the configuration information of the threshold 3 of each candidate cell is as follows:

PSCell 1：阈值3＝85dBm；PSCell 1: Threshold 3 = 85dBm;

PSCell 2：阈值3＝78dBm；PSCell 2: Threshold 3 = 78dBm;

PSCell 3：阈值3＝80dBm；PSCell 3: Threshold 3 = 80dBm;

PSCell 4：阈值3＝60dBm；PSCell 4: Threshold 3 = 60dBm;

PSCell 5：阈值3＝112dBm；PSCell 5: Threshold 3 = 112dBm;

PSCell 6：阈值3＝120dBm。PSCell 6: Threshold 3 = 120dBm.

步骤2：UE当前连接在PSCell 0，并进行相应的测量过程，当前PSCell 0的RRM测量配置中配置的s-MeasureConfig的值为70dBm，即阈值2的值为70dBm。Step 2: The UE is currently connected to PSCell 0 and performs the corresponding measurement process. The value of s-MeasureConfig configured in the current RRM measurement configuration of PSCell 0 is 70dBm, that is, the value of threshold 2 is 70dBm.

步骤3：当UE测量到当前服务小区的信号质量低于阈值2时，开启对非服务小区的信号质量的测量。测量到PSCell 3的信号质量为85dBm，即满足接入PSCell 3的接入条件。UE判断阈值2和阈值3均满足，应该执行PSCell变更(change)过程，从PSCell 0变更到PSCell 3。Step 3: When the UE measures that the signal quality of the current serving cell is lower than threshold 2, it starts measuring the signal quality of non-serving cells. The measured signal quality of PSCell 3 is 85dBm, which satisfies the access conditions for accessing PSCell 3. The UE determines that both threshold 2 and threshold 3 are met, and should execute the PSCell change process, changing from PSCell 0 to PSCell 3.

步骤4：UE执行PSCell变更过程从PSCell 0变更到PSCell 3，当UE成功接入PSCell 3后，UE保留PSCell 1至PSCell 6即所有候选小区的配置信息，并继续进行评估。 Step 4: The UE executes the PSCell change process to change from PSCell 0 to PSCell 3. After the UE successfully accesses PSCell 3, the UE retains the configuration information of PSCell 1 to PSCell 6, that is, all candidate cells, and continues to evaluate.

步骤5：当UE检测到当前PSCell 3的信号质量已经低于70dBm，即满足离开PSCell 3的条件，同时PSCell 5测量的信号质量为120dBm,即满足接入PSCell 5的接入条件。UE判断阈值2和阈值3均满足，应该执行PSCell变更过程，从PSCell 3变更到PSCell 5。Step 5: When the UE detects that the signal quality of the current PSCell 3 is lower than 70dBm, it meets the conditions for leaving PSCell 3, and the signal quality measured by PSCell 5 is 120dBm, it meets the access conditions for accessing PSCell 5. The UE determines that both threshold 2 and threshold 3 are met, and should execute the PSCell change process, changing from PSCell 3 to PSCell 5.

步骤6：UE执行PSCell变更过程从PSCell 3变更到PSCell 5，当UE成功接入PSCell 5后，UE保留PSCell 1至PSCell 6的配置信息，并继续进行评估。Step 6: The UE executes the PSCell change process from PSCell 3 to PSCell 5. After the UE successfully accesses PSCell 5, the UE retains the configuration information of PSCell 1 to PSCell 6 and continues the evaluation.

示例4、连续条件小区变更中评估离开条件的当第一阈值为阈值1时，阈值1可以为间接配置的。Example 4: When the first threshold value is threshold 1 when evaluating the leaving condition in continuous conditional cell change, threshold 1 may be indirectly configured.

在前述示例2中，阈值1是直接配置的，即配置的值为阈值1的绝对值。阈值1也可以是间接配置的，通过一个偏置值offset2来计算出阈值1的取值，阈值1的绝对值为s-MeasureConfig+/-offset2(间接值)。即阈值1不是网络显示配置的，是由UE通过网络显示配置的offset2和网络显示配置的s-MeasureConfig计算获得的。In the above example 2, threshold 1 is directly configured, that is, the configured value is the absolute value of threshold 1. Threshold 1 can also be indirectly configured, and the value of threshold 1 is calculated by an offset value offset2, and the absolute value of threshold 1 is s-MeasureConfig+/-offset2 (indirect value). That is, threshold 1 is not configured by the network display, but is calculated by the UE through offset2 configured by the network display and s-MeasureConfig configured by the network display.

其中，offset2的配置方式可以同示例2中的阈值1的配置方式，只是配置的值大小不同；而s-MeasureConfig是显示配置在候选小区的RRM测量配置中。The configuration method of offset2 may be the same as the configuration method of threshold 1 in Example 2, except that the configured value is different; and s-MeasureConfig is displayed in the RRM measurement configuration of the candidate cell.

例如，针对某个候选小区，网络在该候选小区的RRM测量配置中显示配置s-MeasureConfig＝50dBm，在该候选小区配置内部或外部显示配置offset2的值为30dBm，那么阈值1的绝对值＝80dBm或20dBm。后续利用该间接配置的阈值1判断是否满足离开条件，并实现连续条件小区的变更的过程与示例2中的相同，此处不再赘述。For example, for a candidate cell, the network displays s-MeasureConfig=50dBm in the RRM measurement configuration of the candidate cell, and displays the value of offset2 as 30dBm inside or outside the candidate cell configuration, then the absolute value of threshold 1=80dBm or 20dBm. The subsequent process of using the indirectly configured threshold 1 to determine whether the leaving condition is met and realizing the change of the continuous conditional cell is the same as in Example 2, and will not be repeated here.

示例5、基于第一偏置值判断满足变更条件，从而实现连续条件小区变更的过程如下所示：Example 5: The process of determining whether the change condition is met based on the first offset value, thereby implementing continuous conditional cell change is as follows:

步骤1：在DC场景下，UE收到网络侧发送的各候选PSCell配置信息及其相应的执行条件配置信息。Step 1: In the DC scenario, the UE receives configuration information of each candidate PSCell and its corresponding execution condition configuration information sent by the network side.

例如，UE当前连接的PSCell为PSCell 0；具体的各候选PSCell 配置信息主要包括PSCell 1，PSCell 2，PSCell 3，PSCell 4，PSCell 5，PSCell 6一共6个候选PSCell的配置信息。For example, the PSCell currently connected to the UE is PSCell 0; The configuration information mainly includes the configuration information of 6 candidate PSCells, namely PSCell 1, PSCell 2, PSCell 3, PSCell 4, PSCell 5 and PSCell 6.

具体的该执行条件配置信息包括第一偏置值offset1，此offset1为某个候选小区的信号质量好于当前服务小区的信号质量的配置信息。Specifically, the execution condition configuration information includes a first offset value offset1, and the offset1 is configuration information that the signal quality of a candidate cell is better than the signal quality of the current serving cell.

此offset1可以是一个共用的配置值；也可以为每个候选小区各配置一个offset1值；也可以为每个候选小区配置一个offset1列表，在该offset1列表中，针对不同的服务小区，分别对应一个offset1值。此offset1值可以是MN配置的，也可以是源SN或目标SN配置的。This offset1 can be a common configuration value; or an offset1 value can be configured for each candidate cell; or an offset1 list can be configured for each candidate cell, in which an offset1 value corresponds to each serving cell. This offset1 value can be configured by the MN, or by the source SN or the target SN.

情况一、若offset1是一个共用的配置值，例如，offset1＝30dBm，基于offset1实现连续条件小区变更的过程如下：Case 1: If offset1 is a common configuration value, for example, offset1 = 30 dBm, the process of implementing continuous conditional cell change based on offset1 is as follows:

步骤2-1：UE当前连接在PSCell 0，并进行相应的测量过程。Step 2-1: The UE is currently connected to PSCell 0 and performs the corresponding measurement process.

步骤3-1：若UE测量到当前服务小区的信号质量为60dBm，PSCell 2的信号质量为95dBm，判断服务小区的信号质量好于PSCell 2的信号质量的差值即95dBm-60dBm＝35dBm，超过了offset1即30dBm，UE决定进行PSCell变更过程，从PSCell 0变更到PSCell 2。Step 3-1: If the UE measures the signal quality of the current serving cell to be 60dBm and the signal quality of PSCell 2 to be 95dBm, and determines that the signal quality of the serving cell is better than the signal quality of PSCell 2 by a difference of 95dBm-60dBm=35dBm, which exceeds offset1, i.e. 30dBm, the UE decides to perform the PSCell change process from PSCell 0 to PSCell 2.

步骤4-1：UE执行PSCell变更过程从PSCell 0变更到PSCell 2，当UE成功接入PSCell 2后，UE保留PSCell 1至PSCell 6的配置信息，并继续进行评估。Step 4-1: The UE executes the PSCell change process from PSCell 0 to PSCell 2. After the UE successfully accesses PSCell 2, the UE retains the configuration information of PSCell 1 to PSCell 6 and continues the evaluation.

步骤5-1：若UE测量当前服务小区(PSCell 2)的信号质量为70dBm，PSCell 4的信号质量为110dBm，服务小区的信号质量好于PSCell 2的信号质量的差值即110dBm-70dBm＝40dBm，超过了offset1，UE决定进行PSCell变更过程，从PSCell 2变更到PSCell 4。Step 5-1: If the UE measures the signal quality of the current serving cell (PSCell 2) as 70dBm and the signal quality of PSCell 4 as 110dBm, the difference between the signal quality of the serving cell and the signal quality of PSCell 2, i.e. 110dBm-70dBm=40dBm, exceeds offset1, the UE decides to perform the PSCell change process from PSCell 2 to PSCell 4.

步骤6-1：UE执行PSCell变更过程从PSCell 2变更到PSCell 4，当UE成功接入PSCell 4后，UE保留PSCell 1至PSCell 6的配置信息，并继续进行评估。Step 6-1: The UE executes the PSCell change process from PSCell 2 to PSCell 4. After the UE successfully accesses PSCell 4, the UE retains the configuration information of PSCell 1 to PSCell 6 and continues to evaluate.

情况二、若offset1是为每一候选小区配置的值，例如，PSCell 1的offset1值offset1-1＝30dBm，PSCell 2的offset1值offset1-2＝15dBm，PSCell 3的offset1值offset1-3＝20dBm，PSCell 4的offset1值offset1- 4＝25dBm，PSCell 5的offset1值offset1-5＝40dBm，PSCell 6的offset1值offset1-6＝10dBm，基于offset1实现连续条件小区变更的过程如下：Case 2: If offset1 is a value configured for each candidate cell, for example, the offset1 value of PSCell 1 is offset1-1=30dBm, the offset1 value of PSCell 2 is offset1-2=15dBm, the offset1 value of PSCell 3 is offset1-3=20dBm, and the offset1 value of PSCell 4 is offset1- 4 = 25dBm, the offset1 value of PSCell 5 is offset1-5 = 40dBm, and the offset1 value of PSCell 6 is offset1-6 = 10dBm. The process of implementing continuous conditional cell change based on offset1 is as follows:

步骤2-2：UE当前连接在PSCell 0，并进行相应的测量过程。Step 2-2: The UE is currently connected to PSCell 0 and performs the corresponding measurement process.

步骤3-2：若UE测量到当前服务小区的信号质量为60dBm，PSCell 2的信号质量为80dBm，服务小区的信号质量好于PSCell 2的信号质量的差值即80dBm-60dBm＝20dBm，超过了offset1-2即15dBm，UE决定进行PSCell变更过程，从PSCell 0变更到PSCell 2。Step 3-2: If the UE measures the signal quality of the current serving cell to be 60dBm and the signal quality of PSCell 2 to be 80dBm, the signal quality of the serving cell is better than the signal quality of PSCell 2 by a difference of 80dBm-60dBm=20dBm, which exceeds offset1-2, i.e. 15dBm. The UE decides to perform the PSCell change process from PSCell 0 to PSCell 2.

步骤4-2：UE执行PSCell变更过程从PSCell 0变更到PSCell 2，当UE成功接入PSCell 2后，UE保留PSCell 1至PSCell 6的配置信息，并继续进行评估。Step 4-2: The UE executes the PSCell change process from PSCell 0 to PSCell 2. After the UE successfully accesses PSCell 2, the UE retains the configuration information of PSCell 1 to PSCell 6 and continues the evaluation.

步骤5-2：若UE测量当前服务小区PSCell 2的信号质量为70dBm，PSCell 4的信号质量为100dBm，服务小区的信号质量好于PSCell 2的信号质量的差值即100dBm-70dBm＝30dBm，超过了offset1-4即25dBm，UE决定进行PSCell变更过程，从PSCell 2变更到PSCell 4。Step 5-2: If the UE measures the signal quality of the current serving cell PSCell 2 as 70dBm and the signal quality of PSCell 4 as 100dBm, the signal quality of the serving cell is better than the signal quality of PSCell 2 by a difference of 100dBm-70dBm=30dBm, which exceeds offset1-4, i.e. 25dBm. The UE decides to perform the PSCell change process from PSCell 2 to PSCell 4.

步骤6-2：UE执行PSCell变更过程从PSCell 2变更到PSCell 4，当UE成功接入PSCell 4后，UE保留PSCell 1至PSCell 6的配置信息，并继续进行评估。Step 6-2: The UE executes the PSCell change process from PSCell 2 to PSCell 4. After the UE successfully accesses PSCell 4, the UE retains the configuration information of PSCell 1 to PSCell 6 and continues the evaluation.

情况三、若为每个候选小区配置一个offset1列表(offset1list)，例如，为PSCell 1针对PSCell 0，PSCell 2，PSCell 3，PSCell 4，PSCell 5，PSCell 6分别配置offset10，offset12，offset13，offset14，offset15，offset16；为PSCell 2针对PSCell 0，PSCell 1，PSCell 3，PSCell 4，PSCell 5，PSCell 6分别配置offset10，offset11，offset13，offset14，offset15，offset16等。Case three, if an offset1 list (offset1list) is configured for each candidate cell, for example, offset10, offset12, offset13, offset14, offset15, offset16 are configured for PSCell 0, PSCell 2, PSCell 3, PSCell 4, PSCell 5, and PSCell 6 for PSCell 1 respectively; offset10, offset11, offset13, offset14, offset15, offset16, etc. are configured for PSCell 0, PSCell 1, PSCell 3, PSCell 4, PSCell 5, and PSCell 6 for PSCell 2 respectively.

步骤2-3：UE当前连接在PSCell 0，并进行相应的测量过程。Step 2-3: The UE is currently connected to PSCell 0 and performs the corresponding measurement process.

步骤3-3：若UE测量PSCell 2的信号质量好于当前服务小区的信号质量的差值，大于为PSCell 2配置的offset1list中针对PSCell 0的offset10，UE决定进行PSCell变更过程，从PSCell 0变更到PSCell 2。 Step 3-3: If the difference between the signal quality of PSCell 2 measured by the UE and the signal quality of the current serving cell is better than that of the current serving cell, and is greater than offset10 for PSCell 0 in the offset1list configured for PSCell 2, the UE decides to perform the PSCell change process from PSCell 0 to PSCell 2.

步骤4-3：UE执行PSCell变更过程从PSCell 0变更到PSCell 2，当UE成功接入PSCell 2后，UE保留PSCell 1至PSCell 6的配置信息，并继续进行评估。Step 4-3: The UE executes the PSCell change process from PSCell 0 to PSCell 2. After the UE successfully accesses PSCell 2, the UE retains the configuration information of PSCell 1 to PSCell 6 and continues the evaluation.

步骤5-3：若UE测量PSCell 4的信号质量好于当前服务小区(PSCell 2)的信号质量的差值，大于为PSCell 4配置的offset1list中针对PSCell 2的offset12，UE决定进行PSCell变更过程，从PSCell 2变更到PSCell 4。Step 5-3: If the signal quality of PSCell 4 measured by the UE is better than the signal quality of the current serving cell (PSCell 2), and the difference is greater than offset12 for PSCell 2 in the offset1list configured for PSCell 4, the UE decides to perform the PSCell change process from PSCell 2 to PSCell 4.

步骤6-3：UE执行PSCell变更过程从PSCell 2变更到PSCell 4，当UE成功接入PSCell 4后，UE保留PSCell 1至PSCell 6的配置信息，并继续进行评估。Step 6-3: The UE executes the PSCell change process from PSCell 2 to PSCell 4. After the UE successfully accesses PSCell 4, the UE retains the configuration information of PSCell 1 to PSCell 6 and continues the evaluation.

示例6、当第二阈值为阈值3时，基于阈值3判断候选小区满足接入条件，从而实现条件小区添加的过程如下：Example 6: When the second threshold is threshold 3, the process of determining whether the candidate cell meets the access condition based on threshold 3, thereby implementing conditional cell addition is as follows:

步骤1：UE在非DC场景下，即UE当前没有一个接入的辅小区组(Secondary Cell Group，SCG)，收到网络发送的各候选小区的配置信息以及执行条件配置信息。Step 1: In a non-DC scenario, that is, the UE currently does not have an accessed secondary cell group (SCG), the UE receives the configuration information of each candidate cell and the execution condition configuration information sent by the network.

步骤2：UE进行执行条件评估，此时UE只需要基于阈值3评估接入候选小区的接入条件。Step 2: The UE performs execution condition evaluation. At this time, the UE only needs to evaluate the access condition of the candidate cell based on threshold 3.

步骤3：若网络为UE配置了PSCell 1至PSCell 6一共6个候选的PSCell配置信息，当UE评估满足候选小区PSCell 2的接入条件，那么UE确定执行PSCell添加(addition)过程，即确定添加候选小区PSCell 2为当前服务PSCell。Step 3: If the network has configured a total of 6 candidate PSCell configuration information from PSCell 1 to PSCell 6 for the UE, when the UE evaluates that the access conditions of the candidate cell PSCell 2 are met, the UE determines to execute the PSCell addition process, that is, determines to add the candidate cell PSCell 2 as the current service PSCell.

步骤4：UE接入候选小区PSCell 2，当UE成功接入候选小区PSCell 2后，UE保存候选小区PSCell 1至PSCell 6所有的配置信息，并用于后续PSCell变更或下一次的PSCell添加。Step 4: The UE accesses the candidate cell PSCell 2. After the UE successfully accesses the candidate cell PSCell 2, the UE saves all the configuration information of the candidate cells PSCell 1 to PSCell 6 and uses it for subsequent PSCell changes or the next PSCell addition.

示例7、通过与一个或两个测量配置标识measID关联的执行条件判断满足接入条件，从而实现条件小区的添加或变更。Example 7: The access condition is determined to be satisfied by the execution condition associated with one or two measurement configuration identifiers measID, thereby realizing the addition or change of the conditional cell.

在示例2、示例3、示例4和示例6中，是通过阈值3来判断候 选小区是否满足接入条件的。除了使用阈值3这个显示配置的具体阈值进行判断外，还可以通过与一个或两个测量配置标识measID关联的执行条件来判断，例如，(类)A4执行条件、(类)A3执行条件或(类)A5执行条件。In Examples 2, 3, 4, and 6, the candidate is determined by using threshold 3. Whether the selected cell meets the access condition. In addition to using the threshold 3, which is a specific threshold of the display configuration, to make a judgment, it can also be judged by the execution conditions associated with one or two measurement configuration identifiers measID, for example, (class) A4 execution condition, (class) A3 execution condition or (class) A5 execution condition.

若基于第一阈值(如阈值1和/或阈值2)判断满足离开条件，同时也满足(类)A4执行条件、(类)A3执行条件或(类)A5执行条件，则UE可执行连续条件小区变更。If the leaving condition is determined to be met based on the first threshold (such as threshold 1 and/or threshold 2), and the (class) A4 execution condition, (class) A3 execution condition or (class) A5 execution condition is also met, the UE can perform a continuous conditional cell change.

当UE在非DC场景下，若满足(类)A4执行条件、(类)A3执行条件或(类)A5执行条件，则UE即可执行条件小区添加。When the UE is in a non-DC scenario, if the (class) A4 execution condition, (class) A3 execution condition or (class) A5 execution condition is met, the UE can perform conditional cell addition.

示例8、主小区组(Master Cell Group，MCG)侧的连续条件小区添加或变更。Example 8: Addition or change of continuous conditional cells on the Master Cell Group (MCG) side.

前述示例2至示例7都是SCG侧的具体实施过程，MCG侧的实施方式与SCG侧实施方式基本相同，即示例2至示例7也可以用于MCG侧。特别是对于MCG侧连续条件小区变更的场景与SCG侧连续条件小区变更的场景，SCG侧实施例中的技术方案也可用于MCG侧。The above-mentioned Examples 2 to 7 are all specific implementation processes on the SCG side, and the implementation methods on the MCG side are basically the same as those on the SCG side, that is, Examples 2 to 7 can also be used on the MCG side. In particular, for the scenarios of continuous conditional cell changes on the MCG side and continuous conditional cell changes on the SCG side, the technical solutions in the SCG side embodiments can also be used on the MCG side.

本公开实施例提供的连续条件小区接入方法，基于执行条件配置信息，该执行条件配置信息中包含离开当前服务小区的条件、接入目标候选小区的接入条件和/或变更服务小区的变更条件，判断各候选小区是否满足上述执行条件，若满足执行条件则UE执行小区添加或变更，接入目标候选小区，并继续进行执行条件的评估来进行后续的小区添加和/或变更，实现了连续条件小区的添加和/变更，简化了连续条件小区添加和/或变更的执行条件判断过程，并降低了执行条件配置的复杂度，减少了信令开销。The continuous conditional cell access method provided by the embodiment of the present disclosure is based on execution condition configuration information, which includes conditions for leaving the current service cell, access conditions for accessing the target candidate cell and/or change conditions for changing the service cell. It is judged whether each candidate cell meets the above execution conditions. If the execution conditions are met, the UE executes cell addition or change, accesses the target candidate cell, and continues to evaluate the execution conditions to perform subsequent cell addition and/or change, thereby realizing the addition and/or change of continuous conditional cells, simplifying the execution condition judgment process of adding and/or changing continuous conditional cells, reducing the complexity of the execution condition configuration, and reducing the signaling overhead.

图2是本公开实施例提供的连续条件小区接入方法的流程示意图之二，如图2所示，本公开实施例提供一种连续条件小区接入方法，其执行主体可以为网络设备，例如，基站等。该方法包括： FIG2 is a second flow chart of a method for continuous conditional cell access provided by an embodiment of the present disclosure. As shown in FIG2 , an embodiment of the present disclosure provides a method for continuous conditional cell access, and the execution subject may be a network device, such as a base station, etc. The method includes:

步骤201、向终端发送执行条件配置信息；所述执行条件配置信息中包含以下条件中的一种或多种：Step 201: Send execution condition configuration information to the terminal; the execution condition configuration information includes one or more of the following conditions:

离开服务小区的离开条件；The conditions for leaving the service cell;

接入候选小区的接入条件；Access conditions for accessing candidate cells;

变更小区的变更条件。Change conditions for changing a neighborhood.

在一些实施例中，所述执行条件配置信息具体包含以下配置信息中的一种或多种：In some embodiments, the execution condition configuration information specifically includes one or more of the following configuration information:

用于判断是否满足所述离开条件的第一阈值；A first threshold for determining whether the leaving condition is met;

用于判断是否满足所述接入条件的第二阈值；a second threshold for determining whether the access condition is met;

用于判断是否满足所述变更条件的第一偏置值。A first offset value is used to determine whether the change condition is met.

在一些实施例中，所述方法还包括：In some embodiments, the method further comprises:

通过以下方式中的一种或多种配置所述第一阈值：The first threshold is configured by one or more of the following methods:

为每一候选小区或服务小区配置一个所述第一阈值；configuring a first threshold for each candidate cell or serving cell;

为每一候选小区或服务小区的每个波束分别配置一个所述第一阈值；configuring one first threshold for each beam of each candidate cell or serving cell;

为每一候选小区或服务小区的波束配置一个公共的第一阈值；A common first threshold is configured for each candidate cell or beam of the serving cell;

为指定的一个或N个波束配置一个所述第一阈值，其中N大于等于2；configuring the first threshold for the specified one or N beams, where N is greater than or equal to 2;

为每一候选小区或服务小区的N个波束组分别配置一个所述第一阈值，其中N大于等于2。One first threshold is configured for each of the N beam groups of each candidate cell or serving cell, where N is greater than or equal to 2.

在一些实施例中，所述方法还包括：In some embodiments, the method further comprises:

通过以下方式中的一种或多种配置所述第二阈值：The second threshold is configured by one or more of the following methods:

为每一候选小区配置一个所述第二阈值；configuring one second threshold for each candidate cell;

为每一候选小区的每个波束分别配置一个所述第二阈值；configuring one second threshold for each beam of each candidate cell;

为每一候选小区的波束配置一个公共的第二阈值；configuring a common second threshold for the beam of each candidate cell;

为指定的一个或N个波束配置一个所述第二阈值，其中N大于等于2； configuring the second threshold for the specified one or N beams, where N is greater than or equal to 2;

为每一候选小区的N个波束组分别配置一个所述第二阈值，其中N大于等于2。One second threshold is configured for each of the N beam groups of each candidate cell, where N is greater than or equal to 2.

在一些实施例中，向终端发送执行条件配置信息之前，所述方法还包括：In some embodiments, before sending the execution condition configuration information to the terminal, the method further includes:

由所述候选小区所在的网络节点确定和/或生成第一阈值；或，The first threshold is determined and/or generated by a network node where the candidate cell is located; or,

由触发连续条件小区接入的网络节点确定和/或生成第二阈值；或，The second threshold is determined and/or generated by a network node that triggers continuous conditional cell access; or,

由所述候选小区所在的网络节点确定和/或生成第二阈值；或，The second threshold is determined and/or generated by the network node where the candidate cell is located; or,

由触发连续条件小区接入的网络节点确定和/或生成第一偏置值；或，The first offset value is determined and/or generated by a network node that triggers continuous conditional cell access; or,

由所述候选小区所在的网络节点确定和/或生成第一偏置值；或，The first bias value is determined and/or generated by a network node where the candidate cell is located; or,

由配置网络节点来生成第一阈值、第二阈值和/或第一偏置值。The first threshold value, the second threshold value and/or the first offset value are generated by configuring the network node.

具体地，本公开实施例提供的连续条件小区接入方法，可参照上述执行主体为终端的连续条件小区接入方法实施例，且能够达到相同的技术效果，在此不再对本实施例中与上述相应方法实施例相同的部分及有益效果进行具体赘述。Specifically, the continuous conditional cell access method provided in the embodiment of the present disclosure can refer to the above-mentioned embodiment of the continuous conditional cell access method in which the execution subject is a terminal, and can achieve the same technical effect. The parts and beneficial effects of this embodiment that are the same as the above-mentioned corresponding method embodiments will not be described in detail here.

图3是本公开实施例提供的一种终端的结构示意图，如图3所示，所述终端包括存储器320，收发机300，处理器310，其中：FIG3 is a schematic diagram of the structure of a terminal provided by an embodiment of the present disclosure. As shown in FIG3 , the terminal includes a memory 320, a transceiver 300, and a processor 310, wherein:

存储器320，用于存储计算机程序；收发机300，用于在所述处理器310的控制下收发数据；处理器310，用于读取所述存储器320中的计算机程序并执行以下操作：The memory 320 is used to store computer programs; the transceiver 300 is used to send and receive data under the control of the processor 310; the processor 310 is used to read the computer program in the memory 320 and perform the following operations:

获取执行条件配置信息；Get execution condition configuration information;

基于所述执行条件配置信息从候选小区中确定目标小区并接入所述目标小区；所述执行条件配置信息中包含以下条件中的一种或多种：Determine a target cell from candidate cells based on the execution condition configuration information and access the target cell; the execution condition configuration information includes one or more of the following conditions:

离开服务小区的离开条件；The conditions for leaving the service cell;

接入候选小区的接入条件； Access conditions for accessing candidate cells;

变更小区的变更条件。Change conditions for changing a neighborhood.

具体地，收发机300，用于在处理器310的控制下接收和发送数据。Specifically, the transceiver 300 is used to receive and send data under the control of the processor 310 .

其中，在图3中，总线架构可以包括任意数量的互联的总线和桥，具体由处理器310代表的一个或多个处理器和存储器320代表的存储器的各种电路链接在一起。总线架构还可以将诸如外围设备、稳压器和功率管理电路等之类的各种其他电路链接在一起，这些都是本领域所公知的，因此，本文不再对其进行进一步描述。总线接口提供接口。收发机300可以是多个元件，即包括发送机和接收机，提供用于在传输介质上与各种其他装置通信的单元，这些传输介质包括无线信道、有线信道、光缆等传输介质。针对不同的用户设备，用户接口330还可以是能够外接内接需要设备的接口，连接的设备包括但不限于小键盘、显示器、扬声器、麦克风、操纵杆等。Among them, in Figure 3, the bus architecture may include any number of interconnected buses and bridges, specifically one or more processors represented by processor 310 and various circuits of memory represented by memory 320 are linked together. The bus architecture can also link various other circuits such as peripherals, regulators, and power management circuits together, which are all well known in the art and are therefore not further described herein. The bus interface provides an interface. The transceiver 300 may be a plurality of components, namely, a transmitter and a receiver, providing a unit for communicating with various other devices on a transmission medium, and these transmission media include transmission media such as wireless channels, wired channels, and optical cables. For different user devices, the user interface 330 may also be an interface that can be connected to external and internal devices, and the connected devices include but are not limited to keypads, displays, speakers, microphones, joysticks, etc.

处理器310负责管理总线架构和通常的处理，存储器320可以存储处理器310在执行操作时所使用的数据。The processor 310 is responsible for managing the bus architecture and general processing, and the memory 320 can store data used by the processor 310 when performing operations.

在一些实施例中，处理器310可以是中央处理器(Central Processing Unit，CPU)、专用集成电路(Application Specific Integrated Circuit，ASIC)、现场可编程门阵列(Field－Programmable Gate Array，FPGA)或复杂可编程逻辑器件(Complex Programmable Logic Device，CPLD)，处理器也可以采用多核架构。In some embodiments, the processor 310 can be a central processing unit (CPU), an application specific integrated circuit (ASIC), a field programmable gate array (FPGA) or a complex programmable logic device (CPLD), and the processor can also adopt a multi-core architecture.

处理器通过调用存储器存储的计算机程序，用于按照获得的可执行指令执行本公开实施例提供的任一所述方法。处理器与存储器也可以物理上分开布置。The processor calls the computer program stored in the memory to execute any of the methods provided by the embodiments of the present disclosure according to the obtained executable instructions. The processor and the memory can also be arranged physically separately.

在一些实施例中，所述执行条件配置信息具体包含以下配置信息中的一种或多种：In some embodiments, the execution condition configuration information specifically includes one or more of the following configuration information:

用于判断是否满足所述离开条件的第一阈值；A first threshold for determining whether the leaving condition is met;

用于判断是否满足所述接入条件的第二阈值； a second threshold for determining whether the access condition is met;

用于判断是否满足所述变更条件的第一偏置值。A first offset value is used to determine whether the change condition is met.

在一些实施例中，基于所述执行条件配置信息从候选小区中确定目标小区，包括：In some embodiments, determining a target cell from candidate cells based on the execution condition configuration information includes:

通过以下方式中的一种或多种判断所述候选小区是否满足所述执行条件配置信息中包含的执行条件：Determining whether the candidate cell satisfies the execution condition included in the execution condition configuration information by one or more of the following methods:

基于第一阈值判断服务小区是否满足所述离开条件；Determining whether the serving cell satisfies the leaving condition based on a first threshold;

在满足所述离开条件的情况下，基于第二阈值判断所述候选小区是否满足所述接入条件；When the leaving condition is met, determining whether the candidate cell meets the access condition based on a second threshold;

或，or,

基于第二阈值判断所述候选小区是否满足所述接入条件；Determining whether the candidate cell meets the access condition based on a second threshold;

或，or,

基于第一偏置值判断所述候选小区是否满足所述变更条件；Determining whether the candidate cell meets the change condition based on the first offset value;

确定满足所述执行条件的候选小区为目标小区。A candidate cell that meets the execution condition is determined as a target cell.

在一些实施例中，基于第一阈值判断服务小区是否满足所述离开条件，包括：In some embodiments, judging whether the serving cell satisfies the leaving condition based on the first threshold includes:

在满足以下条件中的一个或多个的情况下，确定服务小区满足所述离开条件：When one or more of the following conditions are met, it is determined that the serving cell meets the leaving condition:

服务小区的信号质量低于第一阈值；The signal quality of the serving cell is lower than a first threshold;

服务小区的服务波束的信号质量低于第一阈值；The signal quality of the serving beam of the serving cell is lower than a first threshold;

服务小区的连续N个服务波束的信号质量均低于第一阈值，其中N大于等于2；The signal qualities of N consecutive serving beams of the serving cell are all lower than a first threshold, where N is greater than or equal to 2;

服务小区的连续N个服务波束的信号质量分别低于对应的第一阈值，其中N大于等于2；The signal qualities of N consecutive serving beams of the serving cell are respectively lower than corresponding first thresholds, where N is greater than or equal to 2;

服务小区扫描到的N个波束的信号质量均低于第一阈值，其中N大于等于2；The signal qualities of N beams scanned by the serving cell are all lower than a first threshold, where N is greater than or equal to 2;

服务小区扫描到的N个波束的信号质量分别低于对应的第一阈值，其中N大于等于2； The signal qualities of the N beams scanned by the serving cell are respectively lower than the corresponding first thresholds, where N is greater than or equal to 2;

服务小区的连续N个波束信号质量的均值低于第一阈值，其中N大于等于2；The average of the signal qualities of N consecutive beams of the serving cell is lower than a first threshold, where N is greater than or equal to 2;

服务小区扫描到的N个波束的信号质量的均值低于第一阈值，其中N大于等于2。An average of the signal qualities of N beams scanned by the serving cell is lower than a first threshold, where N is greater than or equal to 2.

在一些实施例中，基于第二阈值判断所述候选小区是否满足所述接入条件，包括：In some embodiments, judging whether the candidate cell meets the access condition based on the second threshold includes:

在满足以下条件中的一个或多个的情况下，确定所述候选小区满足所述接入条件：When one or more of the following conditions are met, it is determined that the candidate cell meets the access condition:

候选小区的信号质量高于或等于第二阈值；The signal quality of the candidate cell is higher than or equal to a second threshold;

侯选小区的测量到的波束信号质量高于或等于第二阈值；The measured beam signal quality of the candidate cell is higher than or equal to a second threshold;

侯选小区的测量到的信号质量最好的波束信号质量高于或等于第二阈值；The signal quality of the beam with the best signal quality measured in the candidate cell is higher than or equal to the second threshold;

侯选小区的测量到的至少N个波束信号质量均高于或等于第二阈值，其中N大于等于2；The measured signal qualities of at least N beams of the candidate cell are all higher than or equal to a second threshold, where N is greater than or equal to 2;

侯选小区的测量到的至少N个波束信号质量分别高于或等于对应的第二阈值，其中N大于等于2；The measured signal qualities of at least N beams of the candidate cell are respectively higher than or equal to the corresponding second threshold, where N is greater than or equal to 2;

侯选小区的至少N个信号质量最好的波束信号质量均高于或等于第二阈值，其中N大于等于2；The signal qualities of at least N beams with the best signal qualities of the candidate cells are all higher than or equal to a second threshold, where N is greater than or equal to 2;

侯选小区的至少N个信号质量最好的波束信号质量分别高于或等于对应的第二阈值，其中N大于等于2；The signal qualities of at least N beams with the best signal qualities of the candidate cells are respectively higher than or equal to the corresponding second thresholds, where N is greater than or equal to 2;

侯选小区的测量到的N个波束的信号质量的均值高于或等于第二阈值，其中N大于等于2；An average of the signal qualities of N beams measured by the candidate cell is greater than or equal to a second threshold, where N is greater than or equal to 2;

候选小区的至少N个信号质量最好的波束信号质量的均值高于或等于第二阈值，其中N大于等于2；The average of the signal qualities of at least N beams with the best signal qualities of the candidate cell is greater than or equal to a second threshold, where N is greater than or equal to 2;

满足与一个或两个测量配置标识measID关联的执行条件。The execution conditions associated with one or both measurement configuration identifiers measID are met.

在一些实施例中，所述处理器还用于读取所述存储器中的计算机程序并执行以下操作： In some embodiments, the processor is further configured to read the computer program in the memory and perform the following operations:

通过以下信息中的一种或多种信息识别所述服务波束和/或所述波束：The serving beam and/or the beam is identified by one or more of the following information:

同步信号块SSB索引；Synchronization signal block SSB index;

传输配置指示TCI索引；Transmission Configuration Indicator TCI index;

信道状态信息参考信号CSI-RS索引；Channel state information reference signal CSI-RS index;

CSI-RS集索引。CSI-RS set index.

在一些实施例中，基于第一偏置值判断所述候选小区是否满足所述变更条件，包括：In some embodiments, judging whether the candidate cell satisfies the change condition based on the first offset value includes:

所述候选小区的信号质量与服务小区的信号质量的差值超过第一偏置值。The difference between the signal quality of the candidate cell and the signal quality of the serving cell exceeds a first offset value.

在一些实施例中，所述第一阈值的配置方式包括以下方式中的一种或多种：In some embodiments, the configuration manner of the first threshold includes one or more of the following manners:

为每一候选小区或服务小区配置一个第一阈值；Configuring a first threshold for each candidate cell or serving cell;

为每一候选小区或服务小区的每个波束分别配置一个第一阈值；A first threshold is configured for each beam of each candidate cell or serving cell respectively;

为每一候选小区或服务小区的波束配置一个公共的第一阈值；A common first threshold is configured for each candidate cell or beam of the serving cell;

为指定的一个或N个波束配置一个第一阈值，其中N大于等于2；Configuring a first threshold for a specified one or N beams, where N is greater than or equal to 2;

为每一候选小区或服务小区的N个波束组分别配置一个第一阈值，其中N大于等于2。A first threshold is configured for each of the N beam groups of the candidate cell or the serving cell, where N is greater than or equal to 2.

在一些实施例中，所述第一阈值包括以下值中的一种或多种：In some embodiments, the first threshold comprises one or more of the following values:

绝对阈值；所述绝对阈值是直接配置的；Absolute threshold; the absolute threshold is directly configurable;

相对阈值；所述相对阈值是指通过配置的第二偏置值间接得到的阈值；Relative threshold; the relative threshold refers to a threshold indirectly obtained by configuring the second bias value;

测量配置s-MeasureConfig值。Measurement configuration s-MeasureConfig value.

在一些实施例中，所述第二阈值的配置方式包括以下方式中的一种或多种：In some embodiments, the configuration manner of the second threshold includes one or more of the following manners:

为每一候选小区配置一个第二阈值； configuring a second threshold for each candidate cell;

为每一候选小区的每个波束分别配置一个第二阈值；configuring a second threshold for each beam of each candidate cell;

为每一候选小区的波束配置一个公共的第二阈值；configuring a common second threshold for the beam of each candidate cell;

为指定的一个或N个波束配置一个第二阈值，其中N大于等于2；configuring a second threshold for the specified one or N beams, where N is greater than or equal to 2;

为每一候选小区的N个波束组分别配置一个第二阈值，其中N大于等于2。A second threshold is configured for each of the N beam groups of each candidate cell, where N is greater than or equal to 2.

在一些实施例中，接入所述目标小区，包括：In some embodiments, accessing the target cell includes:

添加所述目标小区为服务小区；或，adding the target cell as a serving cell; or,

将服务小区变更为目标小区。Change the serving cell to the target cell.

在一些实施例中，接入所述目标小区之后，所述处理器还用于读取所述存储器中的计算机程序并执行以下操作：In some embodiments, after accessing the target cell, the processor is further configured to read the computer program in the memory and perform the following operations:

继续基于所述执行条件配置信息进行候选小区执行条件的评估。Continue to evaluate the execution condition of the candidate cell based on the execution condition configuration information.

在此需要说明的是，本公开实施例提供的上述终端，能够实现上述执行主体为终端的方法实施例所实现的所有方法步骤，且能够达到相同的技术效果，在此不再对本实施例中与方法实施例相同的部分及有益效果进行具体赘述。It should be noted here that the above-mentioned terminal provided in the embodiment of the present disclosure can implement all the method steps implemented by the method embodiment in which the execution subject is the terminal, and can achieve the same technical effect. The parts and beneficial effects of this embodiment that are the same as the method embodiment will not be described in detail here.

图4是本公开实施例提供的一种网络设备的结构示意图，如图4所示，所述网络设备包括存储器420，收发机400，处理器410，其中：FIG4 is a schematic diagram of the structure of a network device provided by an embodiment of the present disclosure. As shown in FIG4 , the network device includes a memory 420, a transceiver 400, and a processor 410, wherein:

存储器420，用于存储计算机程序；收发机400，用于在所述处理器410的控制下收发数据；处理器410，用于读取所述存储器420中的计算机程序并执行以下操作：The memory 420 is used to store computer programs; the transceiver 400 is used to send and receive data under the control of the processor 410; the processor 410 is used to read the computer program in the memory 420 and perform the following operations:

向终端发送执行条件配置信息；所述执行条件配置信息中包含以下条件中的一种或多种：Sending execution condition configuration information to the terminal; the execution condition configuration information includes one or more of the following conditions:

离开服务小区的离开条件；The conditions for leaving the service cell;

接入候选小区的接入条件；Access conditions for accessing candidate cells;

变更小区的变更条件。 Change conditions for changing a neighborhood.

具体地，收发机400，用于在处理器410的控制下接收和发送数据。Specifically, the transceiver 400 is used to receive and send data under the control of the processor 410 .

其中，在图4中，总线架构可以包括任意数量的互联的总线和桥，具体由处理器410代表的一个或多个处理器和存储器420代表的存储器的各种电路链接在一起。总线架构还可以将诸如外围设备、稳压器和功率管理电路等之类的各种其他电路链接在一起，这些都是本领域所公知的，因此，本文不再对其进行进一步描述。总线接口提供接口。收发机400可以是多个元件，即包括发送机和接收机，提供用于在传输介质上与各种其他装置通信的单元，这些传输介质包括无线信道、有线信道、光缆等传输介质。处理器410负责管理总线架构和通常的处理，存储器420可以存储处理器410在执行操作时所使用的数据。Among them, in Figure 4, the bus architecture can include any number of interconnected buses and bridges, specifically one or more processors represented by processor 410 and various circuits of memory represented by memory 420 are linked together. The bus architecture can also link various other circuits such as peripherals, voltage regulators, and power management circuits together, which are all well known in the art, so they are not further described herein. The bus interface provides an interface. The transceiver 400 can be a plurality of components, that is, including a transmitter and a receiver, providing a unit for communicating with various other devices on a transmission medium, and these transmission media include transmission media such as wireless channels, wired channels, and optical cables. The processor 410 is responsible for managing the bus architecture and general processing, and the memory 420 can store data used by the processor 410 when performing operations.

处理器410可以是中央处理器(Central Processing Unit，CPU)、专用集成电路(Application Specific Integrated Circuit，ASIC)、现场可编程门阵列(Field－Programmable Gate Array，FPGA)或复杂可编程逻辑器件(Complex Programmable Logic Device，CPLD)，处理器也可以采用多核架构。Processor 410 can be a central processing unit (CPU), an application specific integrated circuit (ASIC), a field programmable gate array (FPGA) or a complex programmable logic device (CPLD). The processor can also adopt a multi-core architecture.

在一些实施例中，所述执行条件配置信息具体包含以下配置信息中的一种或多种：In some embodiments, the execution condition configuration information specifically includes one or more of the following configuration information:

用于判断是否满足所述离开条件的第一阈值；A first threshold for determining whether the leaving condition is met;

用于判断是否满足所述接入条件的第二阈值；a second threshold for determining whether the access condition is met;

用于判断是否满足所述变更条件的第一偏置值。A first offset value is used to determine whether the change condition is met.

在一些实施例中，所述处理器还用于读取所述存储器中的计算机程序并执行以下操作：In some embodiments, the processor is further configured to read the computer program in the memory and perform the following operations:

通过以下方式中的一种或多种配置所述第一阈值：The first threshold is configured by one or more of the following methods:

为每一候选小区或服务小区配置一个所述第一阈值；configuring a first threshold for each candidate cell or serving cell;

为每一候选小区或服务小区的每个波束分别配置一个所述第一 阈值；Each beam of each candidate cell or serving cell is respectively configured with one of the first Threshold value;

为每一候选小区或服务小区的波束配置一个公共的第一阈值；A common first threshold is configured for each candidate cell or beam of the serving cell;

为指定的一个或N个波束配置一个所述第一阈值，其中N大于等于2；configuring the first threshold for the specified one or N beams, where N is greater than or equal to 2;

为每一候选小区或服务小区的N个波束组分别配置一个所述第一阈值，其中N大于等于2。One first threshold is configured for each of the N beam groups of each candidate cell or serving cell, where N is greater than or equal to 2.

在一些实施例中，所述处理器还用于读取所述存储器中的计算机程序并执行以下操作：In some embodiments, the processor is further configured to read the computer program in the memory and perform the following operations:

通过以下方式中的一种或多种配置所述第二阈值：The second threshold is configured by one or more of the following methods:

为每一候选小区配置一个所述第二阈值；configuring one second threshold for each candidate cell;

为每一候选小区的每个波束分别配置一个所述第二阈值；configuring one second threshold for each beam of each candidate cell;

为每一候选小区的波束配置一个公共的第二阈值；configuring a common second threshold for the beam of each candidate cell;

为指定的一个或N个波束配置一个所述第二阈值，其中N大于等于2；configuring the second threshold for the specified one or N beams, where N is greater than or equal to 2;

为每一候选小区的N个波束组分别配置一个所述第二阈值，其中N大于等于2。One second threshold is configured for each of the N beam groups of each candidate cell, where N is greater than or equal to 2.

在一些实施例中，向终端发送执行条件配置信息之前所述处理器还用于读取所述存储器中的计算机程序并执行以下操作：In some embodiments, before sending the execution condition configuration information to the terminal, the processor is further configured to read the computer program in the memory and perform the following operations:

由所述候选小区所在的网络节点确定和/或生成第一阈值；或，The first threshold is determined and/or generated by a network node where the candidate cell is located; or,

由触发连续条件小区接入的网络节点确定和/或生成第二阈值；或，The second threshold is determined and/or generated by a network node that triggers continuous conditional cell access; or,

由所述候选小区所在的网络节点确定和/或生成第二阈值；或，The second threshold is determined and/or generated by the network node where the candidate cell is located; or,

由触发连续条件小区接入的网络节点确定和/或生成第一偏置值；或，The first offset value is determined and/or generated by a network node that triggers continuous conditional cell access; or,

由所述候选小区所在的网络节点确定和/或生成第一偏置值；或，The first bias value is determined and/or generated by a network node where the candidate cell is located; or,

由配置网络节点来生成第一阈值、第二阈值和/或第一偏置值。The first threshold value, the second threshold value and/or the first offset value are generated by configuring the network node.

具体地，本公开实施例提供的上述网络设备，能够实现上述执行 主体为网络设备的方法实施例所实现的所有方法步骤，且能够达到相同的技术效果，在此不再对本实施例中与方法实施例相同的部分及有益效果进行具体赘述。Specifically, the network device provided in the embodiment of the present disclosure can implement the above-mentioned execution All method steps implemented by the method embodiment whose main body is a network device and can achieve the same technical effect, the parts and beneficial effects of this embodiment that are the same as those of the method embodiment will not be described in detail here.

图5是本公开实施例提供的一种连续条件小区接入装置的结构示意图之一，如图5所示，本公开实施例提供一种连续条件小区接入装置，包括获取模块501和接入模块502，其中：FIG5 is one of the structural schematic diagrams of a continuous conditional cell access device provided by an embodiment of the present disclosure. As shown in FIG5 , an embodiment of the present disclosure provides a continuous conditional cell access device, including an acquisition module 501 and an access module 502, wherein:

获取模块501用于获取执行条件配置信息；The acquisition module 501 is used to acquire execution condition configuration information;

接入模块502用于基于所述执行条件配置信息从候选小区中确定目标小区并接入所述目标小区；所述执行条件配置信息中包含以下条件中的一种或多种：The access module 502 is used to determine a target cell from candidate cells based on the execution condition configuration information and access the target cell; the execution condition configuration information includes one or more of the following conditions:

离开服务小区的离开条件；The conditions for leaving the service cell;

接入候选小区的接入条件；Access conditions for accessing candidate cells;

变更小区的变更条件。Change conditions for changing a neighborhood.

在一些实施例中，所述执行条件配置信息具体包含以下配置信息中的一种或多种：In some embodiments, the execution condition configuration information specifically includes one or more of the following configuration information:

用于判断是否满足所述离开条件的第一阈值；A first threshold for determining whether the leaving condition is met;

用于判断是否满足所述接入条件的第二阈值；a second threshold for determining whether the access condition is met;

用于判断是否满足所述变更条件的第一偏置值。A first offset value is used to determine whether the change condition is met.

在一些实施例中，所述接入模块包括：In some embodiments, the access module includes:

判断单元，用于通过以下方式中的一种或多种判断所述候选小区是否满足所述执行条件配置信息中包含的执行条件：A judging unit, configured to judge whether the candidate cell satisfies the execution condition included in the execution condition configuration information by one or more of the following methods:

基于第一阈值判断服务小区是否满足所述离开条件；Determining whether the serving cell satisfies the leaving condition based on a first threshold;

在满足所述离开条件的情况下，基于第二阈值判断所述候选小区是否满足所述接入条件；When the leaving condition is met, determining whether the candidate cell meets the access condition based on a second threshold;

或，or,

基于第二阈值判断所述候选小区是否满足所述接入条件；Determining whether the candidate cell meets the access condition based on a second threshold;

或， or,

基于第一偏置值判断所述候选小区是否满足所述变更条件；Determining whether the candidate cell meets the change condition based on the first offset value;

确定单元，用于确定满足所述执行条件的候选小区为目标小区。The determination unit is used to determine a candidate cell that meets the execution condition as a target cell.

在一些实施例中，所述判断单元包括：In some embodiments, the determining unit includes:

第一确定子单元，用于在满足以下条件中的一个或多个的情况下，确定服务小区满足所述离开条件：The first determining subunit is configured to determine that the serving cell satisfies the leaving condition when one or more of the following conditions are met:

服务小区的信号质量低于第一阈值；The signal quality of the serving cell is lower than a first threshold;

服务小区的服务波束的信号质量低于第一阈值；The signal quality of the serving beam of the serving cell is lower than a first threshold;

服务小区的连续N个服务波束的信号质量均低于第一阈值，其中N大于等于2；The signal qualities of N consecutive serving beams of the serving cell are all lower than a first threshold, where N is greater than or equal to 2;

服务小区的连续N个服务波束的信号质量分别低于对应的第一阈值，其中N大于等于2；The signal qualities of N consecutive serving beams of the serving cell are respectively lower than corresponding first thresholds, where N is greater than or equal to 2;

服务小区扫描到的N个波束的信号质量均低于第一阈值，其中N大于等于2；The signal qualities of N beams scanned by the serving cell are all lower than a first threshold, where N is greater than or equal to 2;

服务小区扫描到的N个波束的信号质量分别低于对应的第一阈值，其中N大于等于2；The signal qualities of the N beams scanned by the serving cell are respectively lower than the corresponding first thresholds, where N is greater than or equal to 2;

服务小区的连续N个波束信号质量的均值低于第一阈值，其中N大于等于2；The average of the signal qualities of N consecutive beams of the serving cell is lower than a first threshold, where N is greater than or equal to 2;

服务小区扫描到的N个波束的信号质量的均值低于第一阈值，其中N大于等于2。An average of the signal qualities of N beams scanned by the serving cell is lower than a first threshold, where N is greater than or equal to 2.

在一些实施例中，所述判断单元还包括：In some embodiments, the determining unit further includes:

第二确定子单元，用于在满足以下条件中的一个或多个的情况下，确定所述候选小区满足所述接入条件：The second determining subunit is configured to determine that the candidate cell meets the access condition when one or more of the following conditions are met:

候选小区的信号质量高于或等于第二阈值；The signal quality of the candidate cell is higher than or equal to a second threshold;

侯选小区的测量到的波束信号质量高于或等于第二阈值；The measured beam signal quality of the candidate cell is higher than or equal to a second threshold;

侯选小区的测量到的信号质量最好的波束信号质量高于或等于第二阈值；The signal quality of the beam with the best signal quality measured in the candidate cell is higher than or equal to the second threshold;

侯选小区的测量到的至少N个波束信号质量均高于或等于第二 阈值，其中N大于等于2；The signal qualities of at least N beams measured by the candidate cell are higher than or equal to the second Threshold, where N is greater than or equal to 2;

侯选小区的测量到的至少N个波束信号质量分别高于或等于对应的第二阈值，其中N大于等于2；The measured signal qualities of at least N beams of the candidate cell are respectively higher than or equal to the corresponding second threshold, where N is greater than or equal to 2;

侯选小区的至少N个信号质量最好的波束信号质量均高于或等于第二阈值，其中N大于等于2；The signal qualities of at least N beams with the best signal qualities of the candidate cells are all higher than or equal to a second threshold, where N is greater than or equal to 2;

侯选小区的至少N个信号质量最好的波束信号质量分别高于或等于对应的第二阈值，其中N大于等于2；The signal qualities of at least N beams with the best signal qualities of the candidate cells are respectively higher than or equal to the corresponding second thresholds, where N is greater than or equal to 2;

侯选小区的测量到的N个波束的信号质量的均值高于或等于第二阈值，其中N大于等于2；An average of the signal qualities of N beams measured by the candidate cell is greater than or equal to a second threshold, where N is greater than or equal to 2;

候选小区的至少N个信号质量最好的波束信号质量的均值高于或等于第二阈值，其中N大于等于2；The average of the signal qualities of at least N beams with the best signal qualities of the candidate cell is greater than or equal to a second threshold, where N is greater than or equal to 2;

满足与一个或两个测量配置标识measID关联的执行条件。The execution conditions associated with one or both measurement configuration identifiers measID are met.

在一些实施例中，还包括识别模块；In some embodiments, further comprising an identification module;

所述识别模块用于通过以下信息中的一种或多种信息识别所述服务波束和/或所述波束：The identification module is used to identify the serving beam and/or the beam through one or more of the following information:

同步信号块SSB索引；Synchronization signal block SSB index;

传输配置指示TCI索引；Transmission Configuration Indicator TCI index;

信道状态信息参考信号CSI-RS索引；Channel state information reference signal CSI-RS index;

CSI-RS集索引。CSI-RS set index.

在一些实施例中，所述判断单元还包括：In some embodiments, the determining unit further includes:

第三确定子单元，用于确定所述候选小区的信号质量与服务小区的信号质量的差值超过第一偏置值。The third determining subunit is configured to determine whether a difference between the signal quality of the candidate cell and the signal quality of the serving cell exceeds a first offset value.

在一些实施例中，所述第一阈值的配置方式包括以下方式中的一种或多种：In some embodiments, the configuration manner of the first threshold includes one or more of the following manners:

为每一候选小区或服务小区配置一个第一阈值；Configuring a first threshold for each candidate cell or serving cell;

为每一候选小区或服务小区的每个波束分别配置一个第一阈值；A first threshold is configured for each beam of each candidate cell or serving cell respectively;

为每一候选小区或服务小区的波束配置一个公共的第一阈值； A common first threshold is configured for each candidate cell or beam of the serving cell;

为指定的一个或N个波束配置一个第一阈值，其中N大于等于2；Configuring a first threshold for a specified one or N beams, where N is greater than or equal to 2;

为每一候选小区或服务小区的N个波束组分别配置一个第一阈值，其中N大于等于2。A first threshold is configured for each of the N beam groups of the candidate cell or the serving cell, where N is greater than or equal to 2.

在一些实施例中，所述第一阈值包括以下值中的一种或多种：In some embodiments, the first threshold comprises one or more of the following values:

绝对阈值；所述绝对阈值是直接配置的；Absolute threshold; the absolute threshold is directly configurable;

相对阈值；所述相对阈值是指通过配置的第二偏置值间接得到的阈值；Relative threshold; the relative threshold refers to a threshold indirectly obtained by configuring the second bias value;

测量配置s-MeasureConfig值。Measurement configuration s-MeasureConfig value.

在一些实施例中，所述第二阈值的配置方式包括以下方式中的一种或多种：In some embodiments, the configuration manner of the second threshold includes one or more of the following manners:

为每一候选小区配置一个第二阈值；configuring a second threshold for each candidate cell;

为每一候选小区的每个波束分别配置一个第二阈值；configuring a second threshold for each beam of each candidate cell;

为每一候选小区的波束配置一个公共的第二阈值；configuring a common second threshold for the beam of each candidate cell;

为指定的一个或N个波束配置一个第二阈值，其中N大于等于2；configuring a second threshold for the specified one or N beams, where N is greater than or equal to 2;

为每一候选小区的N个波束组分别配置一个第二阈值，其中N大于等于2。A second threshold is configured for each of the N beam groups of each candidate cell, where N is greater than or equal to 2.

在一些实施例中，接入模块包括：添加单元，用于添加所述目标小区为服务小区；或，In some embodiments, the access module includes: an adding unit, configured to add the target cell as a serving cell; or,

变更单元，用于将服务小区变更为目标小区。The changing unit is used to change the serving cell to the target cell.

在一些实施例中，还包括评估单元；In some embodiments, further comprising an evaluation unit;

所述评估单元用于继续基于所述执行条件配置信息进行候选小区执行条件的评估。The evaluation unit is used to continue to evaluate the execution condition of the candidate cell based on the execution condition configuration information.

具体地，本公开实施例提供的上述连续条件小区接入装置，能够实现上述执行主体为终端的方法实施例所实现的所有方法步骤，且能够达到相同的技术效果，在此不再对本实施例中与方法实施例相同的 部分及有益效果进行具体赘述。Specifically, the above-mentioned continuous conditional cell access device provided in the embodiment of the present disclosure can implement all the method steps implemented by the method embodiment in which the execution subject is a terminal, and can achieve the same technical effect. The parts and beneficial effects are described in detail.

图6是本公开实施例提供的一种连续条件小区接入装置的结构示意图之二，如图6所示，本公开实施例提供一种连续条件小区接入装置，包括发送模块601。FIG6 is a second schematic diagram of the structure of a continuous conditional cell access device provided by an embodiment of the present disclosure. As shown in FIG6 , an embodiment of the present disclosure provides a continuous conditional cell access device, including a sending module 601 .

所述发送模块601用于向终端发送执行条件配置信息；所述执行条件配置信息中包含以下条件中的一种或多种：The sending module 601 is used to send execution condition configuration information to the terminal; the execution condition configuration information includes one or more of the following conditions:

离开服务小区的离开条件；The conditions for leaving the service cell;

接入候选小区的接入条件；Access conditions for accessing candidate cells;

变更小区的变更条件。Change conditions for changing a neighborhood.

在一些实施例中，所述执行条件配置信息具体包含以下配置信息中的一种或多种：In some embodiments, the execution condition configuration information specifically includes one or more of the following configuration information:

用于判断是否满足所述离开条件的第一阈值；A first threshold for determining whether the leaving condition is met;

用于判断是否满足所述接入条件的第二阈值；a second threshold for determining whether the access condition is met;

用于判断是否满足所述变更条件的第一偏置值。A first offset value is used to determine whether the change condition is met.

在一些实施例中，还包括第一配置模块；In some embodiments, further comprising a first configuration module;

所述第一配置模块用于通过以下方式中的一种或多种配置所述第一阈值：The first configuration module is used to configure the first threshold in one or more of the following ways:

为每一候选小区或服务小区配置一个所述第一阈值；configuring a first threshold for each candidate cell or serving cell;

为每一候选小区或服务小区的每个波束分别配置一个所述第一阈值；configuring one first threshold for each beam of each candidate cell or serving cell respectively;

为每一候选小区或服务小区的波束配置一个公共的第一阈值；A common first threshold is configured for each candidate cell or beam of the serving cell;

为指定的一个或N个波束配置一个所述第一阈值，其中N大于等于2；configuring the first threshold for the specified one or N beams, where N is greater than or equal to 2;

为每一候选小区或服务小区的N个波束组分别配置一个所述第一阈值，其中N大于等于2。One first threshold is configured for each of the N beam groups of each candidate cell or serving cell, where N is greater than or equal to 2.

在一些实施例中，还包括第二配置模块；In some embodiments, further comprising a second configuration module;

所述第二配置模块用于通过以下方式中的一种或多种配置所述 第二阈值：The second configuration module is used to configure the Second threshold:

为每一候选小区配置一个所述第二阈值；configuring one second threshold for each candidate cell;

为每一候选小区的每个波束分别配置一个所述第二阈值；configuring one second threshold for each beam of each candidate cell;

为每一候选小区的波束配置一个公共的第二阈值；configuring a common second threshold for the beam of each candidate cell;

为指定的一个或N个波束配置一个所述第二阈值，其中N大于等于2；configuring the second threshold for the specified one or N beams, where N is greater than or equal to 2;

为每一候选小区的N个波束组分别配置一个所述第二阈值，其中N大于等于2。One second threshold is configured for each of the N beam groups of each candidate cell, where N is greater than or equal to 2.

在一些实施例中，还包括：In some embodiments, it also includes:

第一生成模块，用于由所述候选小区所在的网络节点确定和/或生成第一阈值；或，A first generating module is configured to determine and/or generate a first threshold by a network node where the candidate cell is located; or,

第二生成模块，用于由触发连续条件小区接入的网络节点确定和/或生成第二阈值；或，A second generating module is configured to determine and/or generate a second threshold by a network node that triggers continuous conditional cell access; or,

第三生成模块，用于由所述候选小区所在的网络节点确定和/或生成第二阈值；或，A third generating module is configured to determine and/or generate a second threshold by the network node where the candidate cell is located; or,

第四生成模块，用于由触发连续条件小区接入的网络节点确定和/或生成第一偏置值；或，A fourth generating module is configured to determine and/or generate a first offset value by a network node that triggers continuous conditional cell access; or,

第五生成模块，用于由所述候选小区所在的网络节点确定和/或生成第一偏置值；或，A fifth generating module, configured to determine and/or generate a first bias value by a network node where the candidate cell is located; or,

第六生成模块，用于由配置网络节点来生成第一阈值、第二阈值和/或第一偏置值。A sixth generating module is used to generate the first threshold, the second threshold and/or the first offset value by configuring the network node.

具体地，本公开实施例提供的上述连续条件小区接入装置，能够实现上述执行主体为网络设备的方法实施例所实现的所有方法步骤，且能够达到相同的技术效果，在此不再对本实施例中与方法实施例相同的部分及有益效果进行具体赘述。Specifically, the above-mentioned continuous conditional cell access device provided by the embodiment of the present disclosure can implement all the method steps implemented by the method embodiment in which the execution subject is a network device, and can achieve the same technical effect. The parts and beneficial effects of this embodiment that are the same as the method embodiment will not be described in detail here.

需要说明的是，本公开上述各实施例中对单元/模块的划分是示意性的，仅仅为一种逻辑功能划分，实际实现时可以有另外的划分方 式。另外，在本公开各个实施例中的各功能单元可以集成在一个处理单元中，也可以是各个单元单独物理存在，也可以两个或两个以上单元集成在一个单元中。上述集成的单元既可以采用硬件的形式实现，也可以采用软件功能单元的形式实现。It should be noted that the division of units/modules in the above embodiments of the present disclosure is illustrative and is only a logical function division. In actual implementation, there may be other division methods. In addition, each functional unit in each embodiment of the present disclosure may be integrated into one processing unit, or each unit may exist physically separately, or two or more units may be integrated into one unit. The above-mentioned integrated unit may be implemented in the form of hardware or in the form of software functional unit.

所述集成的单元如果以软件功能单元的形式实现并作为独立的产品销售或使用时，可以存储在一个处理器可读取存储介质中。基于这样的理解，本公开的技术方案本质上或者说对相关技术做出贡献的部分或者该技术方案的全部或部分可以以软件产品的形式体现出来，该计算机软件产品存储在一个存储介质中，包括若干指令用以使得一台计算机设备(可以是个人计算机，服务器，或者网络设备等)或处理器(processor)执行本公开各个实施例所述方法的全部或部分步骤。而前述的存储介质包括：U盘、移动硬盘、只读存储器(Read-Only Memory，ROM)、随机存取存储器(Random Access Memory，RAM)、磁碟或者光盘等各种可以存储程序代码的介质。If the integrated unit is implemented in the form of a software functional unit and sold or used as an independent product, it can be stored in a processor-readable storage medium. Based on this understanding, the technical solution of the present disclosure is essentially or the part that contributes to the relevant technology or all or part of the technical solution can be embodied in the form of a software product. The computer software product is stored in a storage medium, including several instructions to enable a computer device (which can be a personal computer, server, or network device, etc.) or a processor (processor) to perform all or part of the steps of the method described in each embodiment of the present disclosure. The aforementioned storage medium includes: U disk, mobile hard disk, read-only memory (ROM), random access memory (RAM), disk or optical disk and other media that can store program code.

在一些实施例中，还提供一种计算机可读存储介质，所述计算机可读存储介质存储有计算机程序，所述计算机程序用于使计算机执行上述各方法实施例提供的连续条件小区接入方法。In some embodiments, a computer-readable storage medium is further provided, wherein the computer-readable storage medium stores a computer program, and the computer program is used to enable a computer to execute the continuous conditional cell access method provided by the above-mentioned method embodiments.

具体地，本公开实施例提供的上述计算机可读存储介质，能够实现上述各方法实施例所实现的所有方法步骤，且能够达到相同的技术效果，在此不再对本实施例中与方法实施例相同的部分及有益效果进行具体赘述。Specifically, the above-mentioned computer-readable storage medium provided by the embodiment of the present disclosure can implement all the method steps implemented by the above-mentioned method embodiments, and can achieve the same technical effect. The parts and beneficial effects of this embodiment that are the same as the method embodiment will not be described in detail here.

需要说明的是：所述计算机可读存储介质可以是处理器能够存取的任何可用介质或数据存储设备，包括但不限于磁性存储器(例如软盘、硬盘、磁带、磁光盘(MO)等)、光学存储器(例如CD、DVD、BD、HVD等)、以及半导体存储器(例如ROM、EPROM、EEPROM、非易失性存储器(NAND FLASH)、固态硬盘(SSD))等。It should be noted that the computer-readable storage medium can be any available medium or data storage device that can be accessed by the processor, including but not limited to magnetic storage (such as floppy disks, hard disks, magnetic tapes, magneto-optical disks (MO), etc.), optical storage (such as CD, DVD, BD, HVD, etc.), and semiconductor storage (such as ROM, EPROM, EEPROM, non-volatile memory (NAND FLASH), solid-state drive (SSD)), etc.

另外需要说明的是：本公开实施例中术语“第一”、“第二”等是 用于区别类似的对象，而不用于描述特定的顺序或先后次序。应该理解这样使用的术语在适当情况下可以互换，以便本公开的实施例能够以除了在这里图示或描述的那些以外的顺序实施，且“第一”、“第二”所区别的对象通常为一类，并不限定对象的个数，例如第一对象可以是一个，也可以是多个。It should also be noted that: in the embodiments of the present disclosure, the terms "first", "second", etc. are It is used to distinguish similar objects, but not to describe a specific order or sequence. It should be understood that the terms used in this way are interchangeable under appropriate circumstances, so that the embodiments of the present disclosure can be implemented in an order other than those illustrated or described herein, and the objects distinguished by "first" and "second" are generally of the same type, and the number of objects is not limited. For example, the first object can be one or more.

本公开实施例中术语“和/或”，描述关联对象的关联关系，表示可以存在三种关系，例如，A和/或B，可以表示：单独存在A，同时存在A和B，单独存在B这三种情况。字符“/”一般表示前后关联对象是一种“或”的关系。In the embodiments of the present disclosure, the term "and/or" describes the association relationship of associated objects, indicating that three relationships may exist. For example, A and/or B may represent three situations: A exists alone, A and B exist at the same time, and B exists alone. The character "/" generally indicates that the associated objects before and after are in an "or" relationship.

本公开实施例中术语“多个”是指两个或两个以上，其它量词与之类似。The term "plurality" in the embodiments of the present disclosure refers to two or more than two, and other quantifiers are similar thereto.

本公开实施例提供的技术方案可以适用于多种系统，尤其是5G系统。例如适用的系统可以是全球移动通讯(global system of mobile communication，GSM)系统、码分多址(code division multiple access，CDMA)系统、宽带码分多址(Wideband Code Division Multiple Access，WCDMA)通用分组无线业务(general packet radio service，GPRS)系统、长期演进(long term evolution，LTE)系统、LTE频分双工(frequency division duplex，FDD)系统、LTE时分双工(time division duplex，TDD)系统、高级长期演进(long term evolution advanced，LTE-A)系统、通用移动系统(universal mobile telecommunication system，UMTS)、全球互联微波接入(worldwide interoperability for microwave access，WiMAX)系统、5G新空口(New Radio，NR)系统等。这多种系统中均包括终端设备和网络设备。系统中还可以包括核心网部分，例如演进的分组系统(Evloved Packet System，EPS)、5G系统(5GS)等。The technical solution provided by the embodiments of the present disclosure can be applicable to a variety of systems, especially 5G systems. For example, the applicable systems can be global system of mobile communication (GSM) system, code division multiple access (CDMA) system, wideband code division multiple access (WCDMA) general packet radio service (GPRS) system, long term evolution (LTE) system, LTE frequency division duplex (FDD) system, LTE time division duplex (TDD) system, long term evolution advanced (LTE-A) system, universal mobile telecommunication system (UMTS), worldwide interoperability for microwave access (WiMAX) system, 5G new radio (NR) system, etc. These systems include terminal equipment and network equipment. The system can also include core network parts, such as Evolved Packet System (EPS) and 5G System (5GS).

本公开实施例涉及的终端设备，可以是指向用户提供语音和/或数据连通性的设备，具有无线连接功能的手持式设备、或连接到无线 调制解调器的其他处理设备等。在不同的系统中，终端设备的名称可能也不相同，例如在5G系统中，终端设备可以称为用户设备(User Equipment，UE)。无线终端设备可以经无线接入网(Radio Access Network，RAN)与一个或多个核心网(Core Network，CN)进行通信，无线终端设备可以是移动终端设备，如移动电话(或称为“蜂窝”电话)和具有移动终端设备的计算机，例如，可以是便携式、袖珍式、手持式、计算机内置的或者车载的移动装置，它们与无线接入网交换语言和/或数据。例如，个人通信业务(Personal Communication Service，PCS)电话、无绳电话、会话发起协议(Session Initiated Protocol，SIP)话机、无线本地环路(Wireless Local Loop，WLL)站、个人数字助理(Personal Digital Assistant，PDA)等设备。无线终端设备也可以称为系统、订户单元(subscriber unit)、订户站(subscriber station)，移动站(mobile station)、移动台(mobile)、远程站(remote station)、接入点(access point)、远程终端设备(remote terminal)、接入终端设备(access terminal)、用户终端设备(user terminal)、用户代理(user agent)、用户装置(user device)，本公开实施例中并不限定。The terminal device involved in the embodiments of the present disclosure may be a device that provides voice and/or data connectivity to a user, a handheld device with a wireless connection function, or a device connected to a wireless Other processing devices of the modem, etc. In different systems, the names of terminal devices may also be different. For example, in a 5G system, the terminal device may be called User Equipment (UE). Wireless terminal devices can communicate with one or more core networks (CN) via a radio access network (RAN). Wireless terminal devices can be mobile terminal devices, such as mobile phones (or "cellular" phones) and computers with mobile terminal devices. For example, they can be portable, pocket-sized, handheld, computer-built-in or vehicle-mounted mobile devices that exchange language and/or data with the radio access network. For example, Personal Communication Service (PCS) phones, cordless phones, Session Initiated Protocol (SIP) phones, Wireless Local Loop (WLL) stations, Personal Digital Assistants (PDA) and other devices. The wireless terminal device may also be referred to as a system, a subscriber unit, a subscriber station, a mobile station, a mobile station, a remote station, an access point, a remote terminal device, an access terminal device, a user terminal device, a user agent, and a user device, but is not limited in the embodiments of the present disclosure.

本公开实施例涉及的网络设备，可以是基站，该基站可以包括多个为终端提供服务的小区。根据具体应用场合不同，基站又可以称为接入点，或者可以是接入网中在空中接口上通过一个或多个扇区与无线终端设备通信的设备，或者其它名称。网络设备可用于将收到的空中帧与网际协议(Internet Protocol，IP)分组进行相互更换，作为无线终端设备与接入网的其余部分之间的路由器，其中接入网的其余部分可包括网际协议(IP)通信网络。网络设备还可协调对空中接口的属性管理。例如，本公开实施例涉及的网络设备可以是全球移动通信系统(Global System for Mobile communications，GSM)或码分多址接入(Code Division Multiple Access，CDMA)中的网络设备(Base Transceiver Station，BTS)，也可以是带宽码分多址接入(Wide-band  Code Division Multiple Access，WCDMA)中的网络设备(NodeB)，还可以是长期演进(long term evolution，LTE)系统中的演进型网络设备(evolutional Node B，eNB或e-NodeB)、5G网络架构(next generation system)中的5G基站(gNB)，也可以是家庭演进基站(Home evolved Node B，HeNB)、中继节点(relay node)、家庭基站(femto)、微微基站(pico)等，本公开实施例中并不限定。在一些网络结构中，网络设备可以包括集中单元(centralized unit，CU)节点和分布单元(distributed unit，DU)节点，集中单元和分布单元也可以地理上分开布置。The network device involved in the embodiments of the present disclosure may be a base station, which may include multiple cells providing services for the terminal. Depending on the specific application scenario, the base station may also be called an access point, or may be a device in the access network that communicates with the wireless terminal device through one or more sectors on the air interface, or other names. The network device may be used to interchange received air frames with Internet Protocol (IP) packets, and serve as a router between the wireless terminal device and the rest of the access network, wherein the rest of the access network may include an Internet Protocol (IP) communication network. The network device may also coordinate the attribute management of the air interface. For example, the network device involved in the embodiments of the present disclosure may be a network device (Base Transceiver Station, BTS) in the Global System for Mobile communications (GSM) or Code Division Multiple Access (CDMA), or may be a Wide-band Code Division Multiple Access (WCDMA) network. The invention relates to a network device (NodeB) in a wireless Code Division Multiple Access (WCDMA) system, an evolutionary network device (evolutional Node B, eNB or e-NodeB) in a long term evolution (LTE) system, a 5G base station (gNB) in a 5G network architecture (next generation system), a home evolved Node B (HeNB), a relay node, a home base station (femto), a pico base station (pico), etc., which are not limited in the embodiments of the present disclosure. In some network structures, the network device may include a centralized unit (CU) node and a distributed unit (DU) node, and the centralized unit and the distributed unit may also be arranged geographically separately.

本公开中的“基于A确定B”表示确定B时要考虑A这个因素。并不限于“只基于A就可以确定出B”，还应包括：“基于A和C确定B”、“基于A、C和E确定B”、基于“A确定C，基于C进一步确定B”等。另外还可以包括将A作为确定B的条件，例如，“当A满足第一条件时，使用第一方法确定B”；再例如，“当A满足第二条件时，确定B”等；再例如，“当A满足第三条件时，基于第一参数确定B”等。当然也可以是将A作为确定B的因素的条件，例如，“当A满足第一条件时，使用第一方法确定C，并进一步基于C确定B”等。"Determine B based on A" in the present disclosure means that the factor A should be considered when determining B. It is not limited to "B can be determined based on A alone", but should also include: "Determine B based on A and C", "Determine B based on A, C and E", "Determine C based on A, and further determine B based on C", etc. It can also include taking A as a condition for determining B, for example, "When A meets the first condition, use the first method to determine B"; for example, "When A meets the second condition, determine B", etc.; for example, "When A meets the third condition, determine B based on the first parameter", etc. Of course, it can also be a condition that takes A as a factor for determining B, for example, "When A meets the first condition, use the first method to determine C, and further determine B based on C", etc.

网络设备与终端设备之间可以各自使用一或多根天线进行多输入多输出(Multi Input Multi Output，MIMO)传输，MIMO传输可以是单用户MIMO(Single User MIMO，SU-MIMO)或多用户MIMO(Multiple User MIMO，MU-MIMO)。根据根天线组合的形态和数量，MIMO传输可以是2D-MIMO、3D-MIMO、FD-MIMO或massive-MIMO，也可以是分集传输或预编码传输或波束赋形传输等。Network devices and terminal devices can each use one or more antennas for multiple input multiple output (MIMO) transmission. MIMO transmission can be single user MIMO (SU-MIMO) or multi-user MIMO (MU-MIMO). Depending on the form and number of antenna combinations, MIMO transmission can be 2D-MIMO, 3D-MIMO, FD-MIMO or massive-MIMO, or it can be diversity transmission, precoding transmission or beamforming transmission, etc.

本领域内的技术人员应明白，本公开的实施例可提供为方法、系统、或计算机程序产品。因此，本公开可采用完全硬件实施例、完全软件实施例、或结合软件和硬件方面的实施例的形式。而且，本公开 可采用在一个或多个其中包含有计算机可用程序代码的计算机可用存储介质(包括但不限于磁盘存储器和光学存储器等)上实施的计算机程序产品的形式。It should be understood by those skilled in the art that the embodiments of the present disclosure may be provided as methods, systems, or computer program products. Therefore, the present disclosure may take the form of a complete hardware embodiment, a complete software embodiment, or an embodiment combining software and hardware aspects. It can take the form of a computer program product implemented on one or more computer-usable storage media (including but not limited to disk storage and optical storage, etc.) containing computer-usable program codes.

本公开是参照根据本公开实施例的方法、设备(系统)、和计算机程序产品的流程图和/或方框图来描述的。应理解可由计算机可执行指令实现流程图和/或方框图中的每一流程和/或方框、以及流程图和/或方框图中的流程和/或方框的结合。可提供这些计算机可执行指令到通用计算机、专用计算机、嵌入式处理机或其他可编程数据处理设备的处理器以产生一个机器，使得通过计算机或其他可编程数据处理设备的处理器执行的指令产生用于实现在流程图一个流程或多个流程和/或方框图一个方框或多个方框中指定的功能的装置。The present disclosure is described with reference to the flowchart and/or block diagram of the method, device (system), and computer program product according to the embodiment of the present disclosure. It should be understood that each process and/or box in the flowchart and/or block diagram, as well as the combination of the process and/or box in the flowchart and/or block diagram can be implemented by computer executable instructions. These computer executable instructions can be provided to a processor of a general-purpose computer, a special-purpose computer, an embedded processor or other programmable data processing device to produce a machine, so that the instructions executed by the processor of the computer or other programmable data processing device produce a device for implementing the functions specified in one process or multiple processes in the flowchart and/or one box or multiple boxes in the block diagram.

这些处理器可执行指令也可存储在能引导计算机或其他可编程数据处理设备以特定方式工作的处理器可读存储器中，使得存储在该处理器可读存储器中的指令产生包括指令装置的制造品，该指令装置实现在流程图一个流程或多个流程和/或方框图一个方框或多个方框中指定的功能。These processor-executable instructions may also be stored in a processor-readable memory that can direct a computer or other programmable data processing device to operate in a specific manner, so that the instructions stored in the processor-readable memory produce a product including an instruction device that implements the functions specified in one or more processes in the flowchart and/or one or more boxes in the block diagram.

这些处理器可执行指令也可装载到计算机或其他可编程数据处理设备上，使得在计算机或其他可编程设备上执行一系列操作步骤以产生计算机实现的处理，从而在计算机或其他可编程设备上执行的指令提供用于实现在流程图一个流程或多个流程和/或方框图一个方框或多个方框中指定的功能的步骤。These processor-executable instructions may also be loaded onto a computer or other programmable data processing device so that a series of operational steps are executed on the computer or other programmable device to produce a computer-implemented process, whereby the instructions executed on the computer or other programmable device provide steps for implementing the functions specified in one or more processes in the flowchart and/or one or more boxes in the block diagram.

显然，本领域的技术人员可以对本公开进行各种改动和变型而不脱离本公开的精神和范围。这样，倘若本公开的这些修改和变型属于本公开权利要求及其等同技术的范围之内，则本公开也意图包含这些改动和变型在内。 Obviously, those skilled in the art can make various changes and modifications to the present disclosure without departing from the spirit and scope of the present disclosure. Thus, if these modifications and variations of the present disclosure fall within the scope of the claims of the present disclosure and their equivalents, the present disclosure is also intended to include these modifications and variations.

Claims (52)

一种连续条件小区接入方法，应用于终端，包括：A continuous conditional cell access method, applied to a terminal, comprising: 获取执行条件配置信息；Get execution condition configuration information; 基于所述执行条件配置信息从候选小区中确定目标小区并接入所述目标小区；所述执行条件配置信息中包含以下条件中的一种或多种：Determine a target cell from candidate cells based on the execution condition configuration information and access the target cell; the execution condition configuration information includes one or more of the following conditions: 离开服务小区的离开条件；The conditions for leaving the service cell; 接入候选小区的接入条件；Access conditions for accessing candidate cells; 变更小区的变更条件。Change conditions for changing a neighborhood. 根据权利要求1所述的连续条件小区接入方法，其中，所述执行条件配置信息具体包含以下配置信息中的一种或多种：The continuous conditional cell access method according to claim 1, wherein the execution condition configuration information specifically includes one or more of the following configuration information: 用于判断是否满足所述离开条件的第一阈值；A first threshold for determining whether the leaving condition is met; 用于判断是否满足所述接入条件的第二阈值；a second threshold for determining whether the access condition is met; 用于判断是否满足所述变更条件的第一偏置值。A first offset value is used to determine whether the change condition is met. 根据权利要求1或2所述的连续条件小区接入方法，其中，基于所述执行条件配置信息从候选小区中确定目标小区，包括：The continuous conditional cell access method according to claim 1 or 2, wherein determining the target cell from the candidate cells based on the execution condition configuration information comprises: 通过以下方式中的一种或多种判断所述候选小区是否满足所述执行条件配置信息中包含的执行条件：Determining whether the candidate cell satisfies the execution condition included in the execution condition configuration information by one or more of the following methods: 基于第一阈值判断服务小区是否满足所述离开条件；Determining whether the serving cell satisfies the leaving condition based on a first threshold; 在满足所述离开条件的情况下，基于第二阈值判断所述候选小区是否满足所述接入条件；When the leaving condition is met, determining whether the candidate cell meets the access condition based on a second threshold; 或，or, 基于第二阈值判断所述候选小区是否满足所述接入条件；Determining whether the candidate cell meets the access condition based on a second threshold; 或，or, 基于第一偏置值判断所述候选小区是否满足所述变更条件；Determining whether the candidate cell meets the change condition based on the first offset value; 确定满足所述执行条件的候选小区为目标小区。A candidate cell that meets the execution condition is determined as a target cell. 根据权利要求3所述的连续条件小区接入方法，其中，基于 第一阈值判断服务小区是否满足所述离开条件，包括：The continuous conditional cell access method according to claim 3, wherein based on The first threshold determines whether the serving cell meets the leaving condition, including: 在满足以下条件中的一个或多个的情况下，确定服务小区满足所述离开条件：When one or more of the following conditions are met, it is determined that the serving cell meets the leaving condition: 服务小区的信号质量低于第一阈值；The signal quality of the serving cell is lower than a first threshold; 服务小区的服务波束的信号质量低于第一阈值；The signal quality of the serving beam of the serving cell is lower than a first threshold; 服务小区的连续N个服务波束的信号质量均低于第一阈值，其中N大于等于2；The signal qualities of N consecutive serving beams of the serving cell are all lower than a first threshold, where N is greater than or equal to 2; 服务小区的连续N个服务波束的信号质量分别低于对应的第一阈值，其中N大于等于2；The signal qualities of N consecutive serving beams of the serving cell are respectively lower than corresponding first thresholds, where N is greater than or equal to 2; 服务小区扫描到的N个波束的信号质量均低于第一阈值，其中N大于等于2；The signal qualities of N beams scanned by the serving cell are all lower than a first threshold, where N is greater than or equal to 2; 服务小区扫描到的N个波束的信号质量分别低于对应的第一阈值，其中N大于等于2；The signal qualities of the N beams scanned by the serving cell are respectively lower than the corresponding first thresholds, where N is greater than or equal to 2; 服务小区的连续N个波束信号质量的均值低于第一阈值，其中N大于等于2；The average of the signal qualities of N consecutive beams of the serving cell is lower than a first threshold, where N is greater than or equal to 2; 服务小区扫描到的N个波束的信号质量的均值低于第一阈值，其中N大于等于2。An average of the signal qualities of N beams scanned by the serving cell is lower than a first threshold, where N is greater than or equal to 2. 根据权利要求3所述的连续条件小区接入方法，其中，基于第二阈值判断所述候选小区是否满足所述接入条件，包括：The continuous conditional cell access method according to claim 3, wherein judging whether the candidate cell meets the access condition based on the second threshold comprises: 在满足以下条件中的一个或多个的情况下，确定所述候选小区满足所述接入条件：When one or more of the following conditions are met, it is determined that the candidate cell meets the access condition: 候选小区的信号质量高于或等于第二阈值；The signal quality of the candidate cell is higher than or equal to a second threshold; 侯选小区的测量到的波束信号质量高于或等于第二阈值；The measured beam signal quality of the candidate cell is higher than or equal to a second threshold; 侯选小区的测量到的信号质量最好的波束信号质量高于或等于第二阈值；The signal quality of the beam with the best signal quality measured in the candidate cell is higher than or equal to the second threshold; 侯选小区的测量到的至少N个波束信号质量均高于或等于第二阈值，其中N大于等于2； The measured signal qualities of at least N beams of the candidate cell are all higher than or equal to a second threshold, where N is greater than or equal to 2; 侯选小区的测量到的至少N个波束信号质量分别高于或等于对应的第二阈值，其中N大于等于2；The measured signal qualities of at least N beams of the candidate cell are respectively higher than or equal to the corresponding second threshold, where N is greater than or equal to 2; 侯选小区的至少N个信号质量最好的波束信号质量均高于或等于第二阈值，其中N大于等于2；The signal qualities of at least N beams with the best signal qualities of the candidate cells are all higher than or equal to a second threshold, where N is greater than or equal to 2; 侯选小区的至少N个信号质量最好的波束信号质量分别高于或等于对应的第二阈值，其中N大于等于2；The signal qualities of at least N beams with the best signal qualities of the candidate cells are respectively higher than or equal to the corresponding second thresholds, where N is greater than or equal to 2; 侯选小区的测量到的N个波束的信号质量的均值高于或等于第二阈值，其中N大于等于2；An average of the signal qualities of N beams measured by the candidate cell is greater than or equal to a second threshold, where N is greater than or equal to 2; 候选小区的至少N个信号质量最好的波束信号质量的均值高于或等于第二阈值，其中N大于等于2；The average of the signal qualities of at least N beams with the best signal qualities of the candidate cell is greater than or equal to a second threshold, where N is greater than or equal to 2; 满足与一个或两个测量配置标识measID关联的执行条件。The execution conditions associated with one or both measurement configuration identifiers measID are met. 根据权利要求4或5所述的连续条件小区接入方法，其中，所述方法还包括：The continuous conditional cell access method according to claim 4 or 5, wherein the method further comprises: 通过以下信息中的一种或多种信息识别所述服务波束和/或所述波束：The serving beam and/or the beam is identified by one or more of the following information: 同步信号块SSB索引；Synchronization signal block SSB index; 传输配置指示TCI索引；Transmission Configuration Indicator TCI index; 信道状态信息参考信号CSI-RS索引；Channel state information reference signal CSI-RS index; CSI-RS集索引。CSI-RS set index. 根据权利要求3所述的连续条件小区接入方法，其中，基于第一偏置值判断所述候选小区是否满足所述变更条件，包括：The continuous conditional cell access method according to claim 3, wherein judging whether the candidate cell meets the change condition based on the first bias value comprises: 所述候选小区的信号质量与服务小区的信号质量的差值超过第一偏置值。The difference between the signal quality of the candidate cell and the signal quality of the serving cell exceeds a first offset value. 根据权利要求2所述的连续条件小区接入方法，其中，所述第一阈值的配置方式包括以下方式中的一种或多种：The continuous conditional cell access method according to claim 2, wherein the configuration manner of the first threshold includes one or more of the following manners: 为每一候选小区或服务小区配置一个第一阈值；Configuring a first threshold for each candidate cell or serving cell; 为每一候选小区或服务小区的每个波束分别配置一个第一阈值； A first threshold is configured for each beam of each candidate cell or serving cell respectively; 为每一候选小区或服务小区的波束配置一个公共的第一阈值；A common first threshold is configured for each candidate cell or beam of the serving cell; 为指定的一个或N个波束配置一个第一阈值，其中N大于等于2；Configuring a first threshold for a specified one or N beams, where N is greater than or equal to 2; 为每一候选小区或服务小区的N个波束组分别配置一个第一阈值，其中N大于等于2。A first threshold is configured for each of the N beam groups of the candidate cell or the serving cell, where N is greater than or equal to 2. 根据权利要求2所述的连续条件小区接入方法，其中，所述第一阈值包括以下值中的一种或多种：The continuous conditional cell access method according to claim 2, wherein the first threshold comprises one or more of the following values: 绝对阈值；所述绝对阈值是直接配置的；Absolute threshold; the absolute threshold is directly configurable; 相对阈值；所述相对阈值是指通过配置的第二偏置值间接得到的阈值；Relative threshold; the relative threshold refers to a threshold indirectly obtained by configuring the second bias value; 测量配置s-MeasureConfig值。Measurement configuration s-MeasureConfig value. 根据权利要求2所述的连续条件小区接入方法，其中，所述第二阈值的配置方式包括以下方式中的一种或多种：The continuous conditional cell access method according to claim 2, wherein the configuration manner of the second threshold includes one or more of the following manners: 为每一候选小区配置一个第二阈值；configuring a second threshold for each candidate cell; 为每一候选小区的每个波束分别配置一个第二阈值；configuring a second threshold for each beam of each candidate cell; 为每一候选小区的波束配置一个公共的第二阈值；configuring a common second threshold for the beam of each candidate cell; 为指定的一个或N个波束配置一个第二阈值，其中N大于等于2；configuring a second threshold for the specified one or N beams, where N is greater than or equal to 2; 为每一候选小区的N个波束组分别配置一个第二阈值，其中N大于等于2。A second threshold is configured for each of the N beam groups of each candidate cell, where N is greater than or equal to 2. 根据权利要求1所述的连续条件小区接入方法，其中，接入所述目标小区，包括：The continuous conditional cell access method according to claim 1, wherein accessing the target cell comprises: 添加所述目标小区为服务小区；或，adding the target cell as a serving cell; or, 将服务小区变更为目标小区。Change the serving cell to the target cell. 根据权利要求1所述的连续条件小区接入方法，其中，接入所述目标小区之后，所述方法还包括：The continuous conditional cell access method according to claim 1, wherein after accessing the target cell, the method further comprises: 继续基于所述执行条件配置信息进行候选小区执行条件的评估。 Continue to evaluate the execution condition of the candidate cell based on the execution condition configuration information. 一种连续条件小区接入方法，应用于网络设备，包括：A continuous conditional cell access method, applied to a network device, comprising: 向终端发送执行条件配置信息；所述执行条件配置信息中包含以下条件中的一种或多种：Sending execution condition configuration information to the terminal; the execution condition configuration information includes one or more of the following conditions: 离开服务小区的离开条件；The conditions for leaving the service cell; 接入候选小区的接入条件；Access conditions for accessing candidate cells; 变更小区的变更条件。Change conditions for changing a neighborhood. 根据权利要求13所述的连续条件小区接入方法，其中，所述执行条件配置信息具体包含以下配置信息中的一种或多种：The continuous conditional cell access method according to claim 13, wherein the execution condition configuration information specifically includes one or more of the following configuration information: 用于判断是否满足所述离开条件的第一阈值；A first threshold for determining whether the leaving condition is met; 用于判断是否满足所述接入条件的第二阈值；a second threshold for determining whether the access condition is met; 用于判断是否满足所述变更条件的第一偏置值。A first offset value is used to determine whether the change condition is met. 根据权利要求14所述的连续条件小区接入方法，其中，所述方法还包括：The continuous conditional cell access method according to claim 14, wherein the method further comprises: 通过以下方式中的一种或多种配置所述第一阈值：The first threshold is configured by one or more of the following methods: 为每一候选小区或服务小区配置一个所述第一阈值；configuring a first threshold for each candidate cell or serving cell; 为每一候选小区或服务小区的每个波束分别配置一个所述第一阈值；configuring one first threshold for each beam of each candidate cell or serving cell; 为每一候选小区或服务小区的波束配置一个公共的第一阈值；A common first threshold is configured for each candidate cell or beam of the serving cell; 为指定的一个或N个波束配置一个所述第一阈值，其中N大于等于2；configuring the first threshold for the specified one or N beams, where N is greater than or equal to 2; 为每一候选小区或服务小区的N个波束组分别配置一个所述第一阈值，其中N大于等于2。One first threshold is configured for each of the N beam groups of each candidate cell or serving cell, where N is greater than or equal to 2. 根据权利要求14所述的连续条件小区接入方法，其中，所述方法还包括：The continuous conditional cell access method according to claim 14, wherein the method further comprises: 通过以下方式中的一种或多种配置所述第二阈值：The second threshold is configured by one or more of the following methods: 为每一候选小区配置一个所述第二阈值；configuring one second threshold for each candidate cell; 为每一候选小区的每个波束分别配置一个所述第二阈值； configuring one second threshold for each beam of each candidate cell; 为每一候选小区的波束配置一个公共的第二阈值；configuring a common second threshold for the beam of each candidate cell; 为指定的一个或N个波束配置一个所述第二阈值，其中N大于等于2；configuring the second threshold for the specified one or N beams, where N is greater than or equal to 2; 为每一候选小区的N个波束组分别配置一个所述第二阈值，其中N大于等于2。One second threshold is configured for each of the N beam groups of each candidate cell, where N is greater than or equal to 2. 根据权利要求13所述的连续条件小区接入方法，其中，向终端发送执行条件配置信息之前，所述方法还包括：The continuous conditional cell access method according to claim 13, wherein before sending the execution condition configuration information to the terminal, the method further comprises: 由所述候选小区所在的网络节点确定和/或生成第一阈值；或，The first threshold is determined and/or generated by a network node where the candidate cell is located; or, 由触发连续条件小区接入的网络节点确定和/或生成第二阈值；或，The second threshold is determined and/or generated by a network node that triggers continuous conditional cell access; or, 由所述候选小区所在的网络节点确定和/或生成第二阈值；或，The second threshold is determined and/or generated by the network node where the candidate cell is located; or, 由触发连续条件小区接入的网络节点确定和/或生成第一偏置值；或，The first offset value is determined and/or generated by a network node that triggers continuous conditional cell access; or, 由所述候选小区所在的网络节点确定和/或生成第一偏置值；或，The first bias value is determined and/or generated by a network node where the candidate cell is located; or, 由配置网络节点来生成第一阈值、第二阈值和/或第一偏置值。The first threshold value, the second threshold value and/or the first offset value are generated by configuring the network node. 一种终端，包括存储器，收发机，处理器；A terminal comprises a memory, a transceiver, and a processor; 存储器，用于存储计算机程序；收发机，用于在所述处理器的控制下收发数据；处理器，用于读取所述存储器中的计算机程序并执行以下操作：A memory for storing a computer program; a transceiver for transmitting and receiving data under the control of the processor; and a processor for reading the computer program in the memory and performing the following operations: 获取执行条件配置信息；Get execution condition configuration information; 基于所述执行条件配置信息从候选小区中确定目标小区并接入所述目标小区；所述执行条件配置信息中包含以下条件中的一种或多种：Determine a target cell from candidate cells based on the execution condition configuration information and access the target cell; the execution condition configuration information includes one or more of the following conditions: 离开服务小区的离开条件；The conditions for leaving the service cell; 接入候选小区的接入条件；Access conditions for accessing candidate cells; 变更小区的变更条件。Change conditions for changing a neighborhood. 根据权利要求18所述的终端，其中，所述执行条件配置信 息具体包含以下配置信息中的一种或多种：The terminal according to claim 18, wherein the execution condition configuration information The information specifically includes one or more of the following configuration information: 用于判断是否满足所述离开条件的第一阈值；A first threshold for determining whether the leaving condition is met; 用于判断是否满足所述接入条件的第二阈值；a second threshold for determining whether the access condition is met; 用于判断是否满足所述变更条件的第一偏置值。A first offset value is used to determine whether the change condition is met. 根据权利要求18或19所述的终端，其中，基于所述执行条件配置信息从候选小区中确定目标小区，包括：The terminal according to claim 18 or 19, wherein determining the target cell from the candidate cells based on the execution condition configuration information comprises: 通过以下方式中的一种或多种判断所述候选小区是否满足所述执行条件配置信息中包含的执行条件：Determining whether the candidate cell satisfies the execution condition included in the execution condition configuration information by one or more of the following methods: 基于第一阈值判断服务小区是否满足所述离开条件；Determining whether the serving cell satisfies the leaving condition based on a first threshold; 在满足所述离开条件的情况下，基于第二阈值判断所述候选小区是否满足所述接入条件；When the leaving condition is met, determining whether the candidate cell meets the access condition based on a second threshold; 或，or, 基于第二阈值判断所述候选小区是否满足所述接入条件；Determining whether the candidate cell meets the access condition based on a second threshold; 或，or, 基于第一偏置值判断所述候选小区是否满足所述变更条件；Determining whether the candidate cell meets the change condition based on the first offset value; 确定满足所述执行条件的候选小区为目标小区。A candidate cell that meets the execution condition is determined as a target cell. 根据权利要求20所述的终端，其中，基于第一阈值判断服务小区是否满足所述离开条件，包括：The terminal according to claim 20, wherein judging whether the serving cell satisfies the leaving condition based on the first threshold comprises: 在满足以下条件中的一个或多个的情况下，确定服务小区满足所述离开条件：When one or more of the following conditions are met, it is determined that the serving cell meets the leaving condition: 服务小区的信号质量低于第一阈值；The signal quality of the serving cell is lower than a first threshold; 服务小区的服务波束的信号质量低于第一阈值；The signal quality of the serving beam of the serving cell is lower than a first threshold; 服务小区的连续N个服务波束的信号质量均低于第一阈值，其中N大于等于2；The signal qualities of N consecutive serving beams of the serving cell are all lower than a first threshold, where N is greater than or equal to 2; 服务小区的连续N个服务波束的信号质量分别低于对应的第一阈值，其中N大于等于2；The signal qualities of N consecutive serving beams of the serving cell are respectively lower than corresponding first thresholds, where N is greater than or equal to 2; 服务小区扫描到的N个波束的信号质量均低于第一阈值，其中 N大于等于2；The signal qualities of the N beams scanned by the serving cell are all lower than the first threshold, where N is greater than or equal to 2; 服务小区扫描到的N个波束的信号质量分别低于对应的第一阈值，其中N大于等于2；The signal qualities of the N beams scanned by the serving cell are respectively lower than the corresponding first thresholds, where N is greater than or equal to 2; 服务小区的连续N个波束信号质量的均值低于第一阈值，其中N大于等于2；The average of the signal qualities of N consecutive beams of the serving cell is lower than a first threshold, where N is greater than or equal to 2; 服务小区扫描到的N个波束的信号质量的均值低于第一阈值，其中N大于等于2。An average of the signal qualities of N beams scanned by the serving cell is lower than a first threshold, where N is greater than or equal to 2. 根据权利要求20所述的终端，其中，基于第二阈值判断所述候选小区是否满足所述接入条件，包括：The terminal according to claim 20, wherein judging whether the candidate cell meets the access condition based on the second threshold comprises: 在满足以下条件中的一个或多个的情况下，确定所述候选小区满足所述接入条件：When one or more of the following conditions are met, it is determined that the candidate cell meets the access condition: 候选小区的信号质量高于或等于第二阈值；The signal quality of the candidate cell is higher than or equal to a second threshold; 侯选小区的测量到的波束信号质量高于或等于第二阈值；The measured beam signal quality of the candidate cell is higher than or equal to a second threshold; 侯选小区的测量到的信号质量最好的波束信号质量高于或等于第二阈值；The signal quality of the beam with the best signal quality measured in the candidate cell is higher than or equal to the second threshold; 侯选小区的测量到的至少N个波束信号质量均高于或等于第二阈值，其中N大于等于2；The measured signal qualities of at least N beams of the candidate cell are all higher than or equal to a second threshold, where N is greater than or equal to 2; 侯选小区的测量到的至少N个波束信号质量分别高于或等于对应的第二阈值，其中N大于等于2；The measured signal qualities of at least N beams of the candidate cell are respectively higher than or equal to the corresponding second threshold, where N is greater than or equal to 2; 侯选小区的至少N个信号质量最好的波束信号质量均高于或等于第二阈值，其中N大于等于2；The signal qualities of at least N beams with the best signal qualities of the candidate cells are all higher than or equal to a second threshold, where N is greater than or equal to 2; 侯选小区的至少N个信号质量最好的波束信号质量分别高于或等于对应的第二阈值，其中N大于等于2；The signal qualities of at least N beams with the best signal qualities of the candidate cells are respectively higher than or equal to the corresponding second thresholds, where N is greater than or equal to 2; 侯选小区的测量到的N个波束的信号质量的均值高于或等于第二阈值，其中N大于等于2；An average of the signal qualities of N beams measured by the candidate cell is greater than or equal to a second threshold, where N is greater than or equal to 2; 候选小区的至少N个信号质量最好的波束信号质量的均值高于或等于第二阈值，其中N大于等于2； The average of the signal qualities of at least N beams with the best signal qualities of the candidate cell is greater than or equal to a second threshold, where N is greater than or equal to 2; 满足与一个或两个测量配置标识measID关联的执行条件。The execution conditions associated with one or both measurement configuration identifiers measID are met. 根据权利要求21或22所述的终端，其中，所述处理器还用于读取所述存储器中的计算机程序并执行以下操作：The terminal according to claim 21 or 22, wherein the processor is further configured to read the computer program in the memory and perform the following operations: 通过以下信息中的一种或多种信息识别所述服务波束和/或所述波束：The serving beam and/or the beam is identified by one or more of the following information: 同步信号块SSB索引；Synchronization signal block SSB index; 传输配置指示TCI索引；Transmission Configuration Indicator TCI index; 信道状态信息参考信号CSI-RS索引；Channel state information reference signal CSI-RS index; CSI-RS集索引。CSI-RS set index. 根据权利要求20所述的终端，其中，基于第一偏置值判断所述候选小区是否满足所述变更条件，包括：The terminal according to claim 20, wherein judging whether the candidate cell satisfies the change condition based on the first offset value comprises: 所述候选小区的信号质量与服务小区的信号质量的差值超过第一偏置值。The difference between the signal quality of the candidate cell and the signal quality of the serving cell exceeds a first offset value. 根据权利要求19所述的终端，其中，所述第一阈值的配置方式包括以下方式中的一种或多种：The terminal according to claim 19, wherein the configuration manner of the first threshold comprises one or more of the following manners: 为每一候选小区或服务小区配置一个第一阈值；Configuring a first threshold for each candidate cell or serving cell; 为每一候选小区或服务小区的每个波束分别配置一个第一阈值；A first threshold is configured for each beam of each candidate cell or serving cell respectively; 为每一候选小区或服务小区的波束配置一个公共的第一阈值；A common first threshold is configured for each candidate cell or beam of the serving cell; 为指定的一个或N个波束配置一个第一阈值，其中N大于等于2；Configuring a first threshold for a specified one or N beams, where N is greater than or equal to 2; 为每一候选小区或服务小区的N个波束组分别配置一个第一阈值，其中N大于等于2。A first threshold is configured for each of the N beam groups of the candidate cell or the serving cell, where N is greater than or equal to 2. 根据权利要求19所述的终端，其中，所述第一阈值包括以下值中的一种或多种：The terminal according to claim 19, wherein the first threshold comprises one or more of the following values: 绝对阈值；所述绝对阈值是直接配置的；Absolute threshold; the absolute threshold is directly configurable; 相对阈值；所述相对阈值是指通过配置的第二偏置值间接得到的阈值； Relative threshold; the relative threshold refers to a threshold indirectly obtained by configuring the second bias value; 测量配置s-MeasureConfig值。Measurement configuration s-MeasureConfig value. 根据权利要求19所述的终端，其中，所述第二阈值的配置方式包括以下方式中的一种或多种：The terminal according to claim 19, wherein the configuration manner of the second threshold comprises one or more of the following manners: 为每一候选小区配置一个第二阈值；configuring a second threshold for each candidate cell; 为每一候选小区的每个波束分别配置一个第二阈值；configuring a second threshold for each beam of each candidate cell; 为每一候选小区的波束配置一个公共的第二阈值；configuring a common second threshold for the beam of each candidate cell; 为指定的一个或N个波束配置一个第二阈值，其中N大于等于2；configuring a second threshold for the specified one or N beams, where N is greater than or equal to 2; 为每一候选小区的N个波束组分别配置一个第二阈值，其中N大于等于2。A second threshold is configured for each of the N beam groups of each candidate cell, where N is greater than or equal to 2. 根据权利要求18所述的终端，其中，接入所述目标小区，包括：The terminal according to claim 18, wherein accessing the target cell comprises: 添加所述目标小区为服务小区；或，adding the target cell as a serving cell; or, 将服务小区变更为目标小区。Change the serving cell to the target cell. 根据权利要求18所述的终端，其中，接入所述目标小区之后，所述处理器还用于读取所述存储器中的计算机程序并执行以下操作：The terminal according to claim 18, wherein after accessing the target cell, the processor is further configured to read the computer program in the memory and perform the following operations: 继续基于所述执行条件配置信息进行候选小区执行条件的评估。Continue to evaluate the execution condition of the candidate cell based on the execution condition configuration information. 一种网络设备，包括存储器，收发机，处理器；A network device, comprising a memory, a transceiver, and a processor; 存储器，用于存储计算机程序；收发机，用于在所述处理器的控制下收发数据；处理器，用于读取所述存储器中的计算机程序并执行以下操作：A memory for storing a computer program; a transceiver for transmitting and receiving data under the control of the processor; and a processor for reading the computer program in the memory and performing the following operations: 向终端发送执行条件配置信息；所述执行条件配置信息中包含以下条件中的一种或多种：Sending execution condition configuration information to the terminal; the execution condition configuration information includes one or more of the following conditions: 离开服务小区的离开条件；The conditions for leaving the service cell; 接入候选小区的接入条件；Access conditions for accessing candidate cells; 变更小区的变更条件。 Change conditions for changing a neighborhood. 根据权利要求30所述的网络设备，其中，所述执行条件配置信息具体包含以下配置信息中的一种或多种：The network device according to claim 30, wherein the execution condition configuration information specifically includes one or more of the following configuration information: 用于判断是否满足所述离开条件的第一阈值；A first threshold for determining whether the leaving condition is met; 用于判断是否满足所述接入条件的第二阈值；a second threshold for determining whether the access condition is met; 用于判断是否满足所述变更条件的第一偏置值。A first offset value is used to determine whether the change condition is met. 根据权利要求31所述的网络设备，其中，所述处理器还用于读取所述存储器中的计算机程序并执行以下操作：The network device according to claim 31, wherein the processor is further configured to read the computer program in the memory and perform the following operations: 通过以下方式中的一种或多种配置所述第一阈值：The first threshold is configured by one or more of the following methods: 为每一候选小区或服务小区配置一个所述第一阈值；configuring a first threshold for each candidate cell or serving cell; 为每一候选小区或服务小区的每个波束分别配置一个所述第一阈值；configuring one first threshold for each beam of each candidate cell or serving cell respectively; 为每一候选小区或服务小区的波束配置一个公共的第一阈值；A common first threshold is configured for each candidate cell or beam of the serving cell; 为指定的一个或N个波束配置一个所述第一阈值，其中N大于等于2；configuring the first threshold for the specified one or N beams, where N is greater than or equal to 2; 为每一候选小区或服务小区的N个波束组分别配置一个所述第一阈值，其中N大于等于2。One first threshold is configured for each of the N beam groups of each candidate cell or serving cell, where N is greater than or equal to 2. 根据权利要求31所述的网络设备，其中，所述处理器还用于读取所述存储器中的计算机程序并执行以下操作：The network device according to claim 31, wherein the processor is further configured to read the computer program in the memory and perform the following operations: 通过以下方式中的一种或多种配置所述第二阈值：The second threshold is configured by one or more of the following methods: 为每一候选小区配置一个所述第二阈值；configuring one second threshold for each candidate cell; 为每一候选小区的每个波束分别配置一个所述第二阈值；configuring one second threshold for each beam of each candidate cell; 为每一候选小区的波束配置一个公共的第二阈值；configuring a common second threshold for the beam of each candidate cell; 为指定的一个或N个波束配置一个所述第二阈值，其中N大于等于2；configuring the second threshold for the specified one or N beams, where N is greater than or equal to 2; 为每一候选小区的N个波束组分别配置一个所述第二阈值，其中N大于等于2。One second threshold is configured for each of the N beam groups of each candidate cell, where N is greater than or equal to 2. 根据权利要求30所述的网络设备，其中，向终端发送执行 条件配置信息之前所述处理器还用于读取所述存储器中的计算机程序并执行以下操作：The network device according to claim 30, wherein the execution Before the conditional configuration information, the processor is also used to read the computer program in the memory and perform the following operations: 由所述候选小区所在的网络节点确定和/或生成第一阈值；或，The first threshold is determined and/or generated by a network node where the candidate cell is located; or, 由触发连续条件小区接入的网络节点确定和/或生成第二阈值；或，The second threshold is determined and/or generated by a network node that triggers continuous conditional cell access; or, 由所述候选小区所在的网络节点确定和/或生成第二阈值；或，The second threshold is determined and/or generated by the network node where the candidate cell is located; or, 由触发连续条件小区接入的网络节点确定和/或生成第一偏置值；或，The first offset value is determined and/or generated by a network node that triggers continuous conditional cell access; or, 由所述候选小区所在的网络节点确定和/或生成第一偏置值；或，The first bias value is determined and/or generated by a network node where the candidate cell is located; or, 由配置网络节点来生成第一阈值、第二阈值和/或第一偏置值。The first threshold value, the second threshold value and/or the first offset value are generated by configuring the network node. 一种连续条件小区接入装置，包括：A continuous conditional cell access device, comprising: 获取模块，用于获取执行条件配置信息；An acquisition module is used to obtain execution condition configuration information; 接入模块，用于基于所述执行条件配置信息从候选小区中确定目标小区并接入所述目标小区；所述执行条件配置信息中包含以下条件中的一种或多种：An access module, configured to determine a target cell from candidate cells based on the execution condition configuration information and access the target cell; the execution condition configuration information includes one or more of the following conditions: 离开服务小区的离开条件；The conditions for leaving the service cell; 接入候选小区的接入条件；Access conditions for accessing candidate cells; 变更小区的变更条件。Change conditions for changing a neighborhood. 根据权利要求35所述的连续条件小区接入装置，其中，所述执行条件配置信息具体包含以下配置信息中的一种或多种：The continuous conditional cell access device according to claim 35, wherein the execution condition configuration information specifically includes one or more of the following configuration information: 用于判断是否满足所述离开条件的第一阈值；A first threshold for determining whether the leaving condition is met; 用于判断是否满足所述接入条件的第二阈值；a second threshold for determining whether the access condition is met; 用于判断是否满足所述变更条件的第一偏置值。A first offset value is used to determine whether the change condition is met. 根据权利要求35或36所述的连续条件小区接入装置，其中，所述接入模块包括：The continuous conditional cell access device according to claim 35 or 36, wherein the access module comprises: 判断单元，用于通过以下方式中的一种或多种判断所述候选小区是否满足所述执行条件配置信息中包含的执行条件： A judging unit, configured to judge whether the candidate cell satisfies the execution condition included in the execution condition configuration information by one or more of the following methods: 基于第一阈值判断服务小区是否满足所述离开条件；Determining whether the serving cell satisfies the leaving condition based on a first threshold; 在满足所述离开条件的情况下，基于第二阈值判断所述候选小区是否满足所述接入条件；When the leaving condition is met, determining whether the candidate cell meets the access condition based on a second threshold; 或，or, 基于第二阈值判断所述候选小区是否满足所述接入条件；Determining whether the candidate cell meets the access condition based on a second threshold; 或，or, 基于第一偏置值判断所述候选小区是否满足所述变更条件；Determining whether the candidate cell meets the change condition based on the first offset value; 确定单元，用于确定满足所述执行条件的候选小区为目标小区。The determination unit is used to determine a candidate cell that meets the execution condition as a target cell. 根据权利要求37所述的连续条件小区接入装置，其中，所述判断单元包括：The continuous conditional cell access device according to claim 37, wherein the judgment unit comprises: 第一确定子单元，用于在满足以下条件中的一个或多个的情况下，确定服务小区满足所述离开条件：The first determining subunit is configured to determine that the serving cell satisfies the leaving condition when one or more of the following conditions are met: 服务小区的信号质量低于第一阈值；The signal quality of the serving cell is lower than a first threshold; 服务小区的服务波束的信号质量低于第一阈值；The signal quality of the serving beam of the serving cell is lower than a first threshold; 服务小区的连续N个服务波束的信号质量均低于第一阈值，其中N大于等于2；The signal qualities of N consecutive serving beams of the serving cell are all lower than a first threshold, where N is greater than or equal to 2; 服务小区的连续N个服务波束的信号质量分别低于对应的第一阈值，其中N大于等于2；The signal qualities of N consecutive serving beams of the serving cell are respectively lower than corresponding first thresholds, where N is greater than or equal to 2; 服务小区扫描到的N个波束的信号质量均低于第一阈值，其中N大于等于2；The signal qualities of N beams scanned by the serving cell are all lower than a first threshold, where N is greater than or equal to 2; 服务小区扫描到的N个波束的信号质量分别低于对应的第一阈值，其中N大于等于2；The signal qualities of the N beams scanned by the serving cell are respectively lower than the corresponding first thresholds, where N is greater than or equal to 2; 服务小区的连续N个波束信号质量的均值低于第一阈值，其中N大于等于2；The average of the signal qualities of N consecutive beams of the serving cell is lower than a first threshold, where N is greater than or equal to 2; 服务小区扫描到的N个波束的信号质量的均值低于第一阈值，其中N大于等于2。An average of the signal qualities of N beams scanned by the serving cell is lower than a first threshold, where N is greater than or equal to 2. 根据权利要求37所述的连续条件小区接入装置，其中，所 述判断单元还包括：The continuous conditional cell access device according to claim 37, wherein The judging unit further comprises: 第二确定子单元，用于在满足以下条件中的一个或多个的情况下，确定所述候选小区满足所述接入条件：The second determining subunit is configured to determine that the candidate cell meets the access condition when one or more of the following conditions are met: 候选小区的信号质量高于或等于第二阈值；The signal quality of the candidate cell is higher than or equal to a second threshold; 侯选小区的测量到的波束信号质量高于或等于第二阈值；The measured beam signal quality of the candidate cell is higher than or equal to a second threshold; 侯选小区的测量到的信号质量最好的波束信号质量高于或等于第二阈值；The signal quality of the beam with the best signal quality measured in the candidate cell is higher than or equal to the second threshold; 侯选小区的测量到的至少N个波束信号质量均高于或等于第二阈值，其中N大于等于2；The measured signal qualities of at least N beams of the candidate cell are all higher than or equal to a second threshold, where N is greater than or equal to 2; 侯选小区的测量到的至少N个波束信号质量分别高于或等于对应的第二阈值，其中N大于等于2；The measured signal qualities of at least N beams of the candidate cell are respectively higher than or equal to the corresponding second threshold, where N is greater than or equal to 2; 侯选小区的至少N个信号质量最好的波束信号质量均高于或等于第二阈值，其中N大于等于2；The signal qualities of at least N beams with the best signal qualities of the candidate cells are all higher than or equal to a second threshold, where N is greater than or equal to 2; 侯选小区的至少N个信号质量最好的波束信号质量分别高于或等于对应的第二阈值，其中N大于等于2；The signal qualities of at least N beams with the best signal qualities of the candidate cells are respectively higher than or equal to the corresponding second thresholds, where N is greater than or equal to 2; 侯选小区的测量到的N个波束的信号质量的均值高于或等于第二阈值，其中N大于等于2；An average of the signal qualities of N beams measured by the candidate cell is greater than or equal to a second threshold, where N is greater than or equal to 2; 候选小区的至少N个信号质量最好的波束信号质量的均值高于或等于第二阈值，其中N大于等于2；The average of the signal qualities of at least N beams with the best signal qualities of the candidate cell is greater than or equal to a second threshold, where N is greater than or equal to 2; 满足与一个或两个测量配置标识measID关联的执行条件。The execution conditions associated with one or both measurement configuration identifiers measID are met. 根据权利要求38或39所述的连续条件小区接入装置，其中，还包括识别模块；The continuous conditional cell access device according to claim 38 or 39, further comprising an identification module; 所述识别模块用于通过以下信息中的一种或多种信息识别所述服务波束和/或所述波束：The identification module is used to identify the serving beam and/or the beam through one or more of the following information: 同步信号块SSB索引；Synchronization signal block SSB index; 传输配置指示TCI索引；Transmission Configuration Indicator TCI index; 信道状态信息参考信号CSI-RS索引； Channel state information reference signal CSI-RS index; CSI-RS集索引。CSI-RS set index. 根据权利要求37所述的连续条件小区接入装置，其中，所述判断单元还包括：The continuous conditional cell access device according to claim 37, wherein the judgment unit further comprises: 第三确定子单元，用于确定所述候选小区的信号质量与服务小区的信号质量的差值超过第一偏置值。The third determining subunit is configured to determine whether a difference between the signal quality of the candidate cell and the signal quality of the serving cell exceeds a first offset value. 根据权利要求36所述的连续条件小区接入装置，其中，所述第一阈值的配置方式包括以下方式中的一种或多种：The continuous conditional cell access device according to claim 36, wherein the configuration method of the first threshold includes one or more of the following methods: 为每一候选小区或服务小区配置一个第一阈值；Configuring a first threshold for each candidate cell or serving cell; 为每一候选小区或服务小区的每个波束分别配置一个第一阈值；A first threshold is configured for each beam of each candidate cell or serving cell respectively; 为每一候选小区或服务小区的波束配置一个公共的第一阈值；A common first threshold is configured for each candidate cell or beam of the serving cell; 为指定的一个或N个波束配置一个第一阈值，其中N大于等于2；Configuring a first threshold for a specified one or N beams, where N is greater than or equal to 2; 为每一候选小区或服务小区的N个波束组分别配置一个第一阈值，其中N大于等于2。A first threshold is configured for each of the N beam groups of the candidate cell or the serving cell, where N is greater than or equal to 2. 根据权利要求36所述的连续条件小区接入装置，其中，所述第一阈值包括以下值中的一种或多种：The continuous conditional cell access device according to claim 36, wherein the first threshold comprises one or more of the following values: 绝对阈值；所述绝对阈值是直接配置的；Absolute threshold; the absolute threshold is directly configurable; 相对阈值；所述相对阈值是指通过配置的第二偏置值间接得到的阈值；Relative threshold; the relative threshold refers to a threshold indirectly obtained by configuring the second bias value; 测量配置s-MeasureConfig值。Measurement configuration s-MeasureConfig value. 根据权利要求36所述的连续条件小区接入装置，其中，所述第二阈值的配置方式包括以下方式中的一种或多种：The continuous conditional cell access device according to claim 36, wherein the configuration method of the second threshold includes one or more of the following methods: 为每一候选小区配置一个第二阈值；configuring a second threshold for each candidate cell; 为每一候选小区的每个波束分别配置一个第二阈值；configuring a second threshold for each beam of each candidate cell; 为每一候选小区的波束配置一个公共的第二阈值；configuring a common second threshold for the beam of each candidate cell; 为指定的一个或N个波束配置一个第二阈值，其中N大于等于2； configuring a second threshold for the specified one or N beams, where N is greater than or equal to 2; 为每一候选小区的N个波束组分别配置一个第二阈值，其中N大于等于2。A second threshold is configured for each of the N beam groups of each candidate cell, where N is greater than or equal to 2. 根据权利要求35所述的连续条件小区接入装置，其中，接入模块包括：The continuous conditional cell access device according to claim 35, wherein the access module comprises: 添加单元，用于添加所述目标小区为服务小区；或，an adding unit, configured to add the target cell as a serving cell; or, 变更单元，用于将服务小区变更为目标小区。The changing unit is used to change the serving cell to the target cell. 根据权利要求35所述的连续条件小区接入装置，其中，还包括评估单元；The continuous conditional cell access device according to claim 35, further comprising an evaluation unit; 所述评估单元用于继续基于所述执行条件配置信息进行候选小区执行条件的评估。The evaluation unit is used to continue to evaluate the execution condition of the candidate cell based on the execution condition configuration information. 一种连续条件小区接入装置，包括：A continuous conditional cell access device, comprising: 发送模块，用于向终端发送执行条件配置信息；所述执行条件配置信息中包含以下条件中的一种或多种：The sending module is used to send execution condition configuration information to the terminal; the execution condition configuration information includes one or more of the following conditions: 离开服务小区的离开条件；The conditions for leaving the service cell; 接入候选小区的接入条件；Access conditions for accessing candidate cells; 变更小区的变更条件。Change conditions for changing a neighborhood. 根据权利要求47所述的连续条件小区接入装置，其中，所述执行条件配置信息具体包含以下配置信息中的一种或多种：The continuous conditional cell access device according to claim 47, wherein the execution condition configuration information specifically includes one or more of the following configuration information: 用于判断是否满足所述离开条件的第一阈值；A first threshold for determining whether the leaving condition is met; 用于判断是否满足所述接入条件的第二阈值；a second threshold for determining whether the access condition is met; 用于判断是否满足所述变更条件的第一偏置值。A first offset value is used to determine whether the change condition is met. 根据权利要求48所述的连续条件小区接入装置，其中，还包括第一配置模块；The continuous conditional cell access device according to claim 48, further comprising a first configuration module; 所述第一配置模块用于通过以下方式中的一种或多种配置所述第一阈值：The first configuration module is used to configure the first threshold in one or more of the following ways: 为每一候选小区或服务小区配置一个所述第一阈值；configuring a first threshold for each candidate cell or serving cell; 为每一候选小区或服务小区的每个波束分别配置一个所述第一 阈值；Each beam of each candidate cell or serving cell is respectively configured with one of the first Threshold value; 为每一候选小区或服务小区的波束配置一个公共的第一阈值；A common first threshold is configured for each candidate cell or beam of the serving cell; 为指定的一个或N个波束配置一个所述第一阈值，其中N大于等于2；configuring the first threshold for the specified one or N beams, where N is greater than or equal to 2; 为每一候选小区或服务小区的N个波束组分别配置一个所述第一阈值，其中N大于等于2。One first threshold is configured for each of the N beam groups of each candidate cell or serving cell, where N is greater than or equal to 2. 根据权利要求48所述的连续条件小区接入装置，其中，还包括第二配置模块；The continuous conditional cell access device according to claim 48, further comprising a second configuration module; 所述第二配置模块用于通过以下方式中的一种或多种配置所述第二阈值：The second configuration module is used to configure the second threshold in one or more of the following ways: 为每一候选小区配置一个所述第二阈值；configuring one second threshold for each candidate cell; 为每一候选小区的每个波束分别配置一个所述第二阈值；configuring one second threshold for each beam of each candidate cell; 为每一候选小区的波束配置一个公共的第二阈值；configuring a common second threshold for the beam of each candidate cell; 为指定的一个或N个波束配置一个所述第二阈值，其中N大于等于2；configuring the second threshold for the specified one or N beams, where N is greater than or equal to 2; 为每一候选小区的N个波束组分别配置一个所述第二阈值，其中N大于等于2。One second threshold is configured for each of the N beam groups of each candidate cell, where N is greater than or equal to 2. 根据权利要求47所述的连续条件小区接入装置，其中，还包括：The continuous conditional cell access device according to claim 47, further comprising: 第一生成模块，用于由所述候选小区所在的网络节点确定和/或生成第一阈值；或，A first generating module is configured to determine and/or generate a first threshold by a network node where the candidate cell is located; or, 第二生成模块，用于由触发连续条件小区接入的网络节点确定和/或生成第二阈值；或，A second generating module is configured to determine and/or generate a second threshold by a network node that triggers continuous conditional cell access; or, 第三生成模块，用于由所述候选小区所在的网络节点确定和/或生成第二阈值；或，A third generating module is configured to determine and/or generate a second threshold by the network node where the candidate cell is located; or, 第四生成模块，用于由触发连续条件小区接入的网络节点确定和/或生成第一偏置值；或， A fourth generating module is configured to determine and/or generate a first offset value by a network node that triggers continuous conditional cell access; or, 第五生成模块，用于由所述候选小区所在的网络节点确定和/或生成第一偏置值；或，A fifth generating module, configured to determine and/or generate a first bias value by a network node where the candidate cell is located; or, 第六生成模块，用于由配置网络节点来生成第一阈值、第二阈值和/或第一偏置值。A sixth generating module is used to generate the first threshold, the second threshold and/or the first offset value by configuring the network node. 一种计算机可读存储介质，所述计算机可读存储介质存储有计算机程序，所述计算机程序用于使计算机执行权利要求1至12或权利要求13至17中的任一项所述的连续条件小区接入方法。 A computer-readable storage medium storing a computer program, wherein the computer program is used to enable a computer to execute the continuous conditional cell access method as described in any one of claims 1 to 12 or claims 13 to 17.
PCT/CN2023/136726 2022-12-30 2023-12-06 Continuous conditional cell access method and apparatus, and storage medium Ceased WO2024140078A1 (en)

Applications Claiming Priority (2)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
CN202211739953.0A CN118283731A (en) 2022-12-30 2022-12-30 Continuous condition cell access method, device and storage medium
CN202211739953.0 2022-12-30

Publications (1)

Publication Number Publication Date
WO2024140078A1 true WO2024140078A1 (en) 2024-07-04

Family

ID=91643880

Family Applications (1)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
PCT/CN2023/136726 Ceased WO2024140078A1 (en) 2022-12-30 2023-12-06 Continuous conditional cell access method and apparatus, and storage medium

Country Status (2)

Country Link
CN (1) CN118283731A (en)
WO (1) WO2024140078A1 (en)

Citations (4)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
CN105722186A (en) * 2014-12-19 2016-06-29 三星电子株式会社 Method to select a candidate cell during cell selection
CN114503667A (en) * 2019-10-03 2022-05-13 高通股份有限公司 Conditional procedure for adding and/or changing Secondary Nodes (SNs)
CN115004774A (en) * 2022-04-22 2022-09-02 北京小米移动软件有限公司 Information reporting method and device
CN115334599A (en) * 2021-05-11 2022-11-11 大唐移动通信设备有限公司 Cell switching and control method and device thereof

Patent Citations (4)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
CN105722186A (en) * 2014-12-19 2016-06-29 三星电子株式会社 Method to select a candidate cell during cell selection
CN114503667A (en) * 2019-10-03 2022-05-13 高通股份有限公司 Conditional procedure for adding and/or changing Secondary Nodes (SNs)
CN115334599A (en) * 2021-05-11 2022-11-11 大唐移动通信设备有限公司 Cell switching and control method and device thereof
CN115004774A (en) * 2022-04-22 2022-09-02 北京小米移动软件有限公司 Information reporting method and device

Also Published As

Publication number Publication date
CN118283731A (en) 2024-07-02

Similar Documents

Publication Publication Date Title
TWI846627B (en) Signal transmission, signal measurement reporting, positioning method and device, computer storage medium
CN114390611B (en) Cell handover method, terminal, base station, device and storage medium
US12356482B2 (en) Communication method and apparatus, and device
WO2020001502A1 (en) Measurement method and measurement device
CN114126054B (en) Beam pointing methods, network equipment, terminals, devices and storage media
CN115460625B (en) Data transmission method, device and storage medium
WO2021017893A1 (en) Beam measurement method and device
CN117014120A (en) Measurement feedback method, device and storage medium
WO2024099243A1 (en) Model monitoring method and apparatus, terminal, and network side device
WO2024067098A1 (en) Model information reporting method, device and apparatus, and storage medium
WO2024093656A1 (en) Configuration method and apparatus for radio resource management (rrm) measurement
WO2024032308A1 (en) Ta transmission method and device
CN117676688A (en) Measurement reporting methods, devices, terminals and network equipment
CN114501625A (en) Signal measurement method, device and storage medium
WO2024066620A1 (en) Beam indication method and apparatus, and storage medium
WO2024169564A1 (en) Cell change configuration method and apparatus, and storage medium
WO2024140078A1 (en) Continuous conditional cell access method and apparatus, and storage medium
CN116095803A (en) SRS transmission power determining method, device, apparatus and storage medium
CN114759964A (en) Information processing method and device and network side equipment
TWI903506B (en) Information transmission methods, devices and storage media
WO2024235240A1 (en) Information transmission method and apparatus, and storage medium
WO2025036014A1 (en) Information transmission method and apparatus, and device
WO2024017082A1 (en) Configuration information indication method and device
WO2024169462A1 (en) Model monitoring method and apparatus, terminal, and network side device
WO2024046092A1 (en) Target cell selection method, configuration method, information transmission method and device

Legal Events

Date Code Title Description
121 Ep: the epo has been informed by wipo that ep was designated in this application

Ref document number: 23910008

Country of ref document: EP

Kind code of ref document: A1

NENP Non-entry into the national phase

Ref country code: DE